JP5307265B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game by firing a game ball into a game area.

  As a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls Is paid out to the player. Furthermore, an effect display device (image display device) such as a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) whose display state can be changed is provided, and predetermined display information (for example, symbols) is updated and displayed on the effect display device. There is a configuration in which variable display (variable display) is performed, and a notification is made as to whether or not a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the display result (stop symbol) of the effect display device. An effect display device that performs variable display is also referred to as a variable display device.

  In addition, the gaming value is a state in which a state of a variable winning ball device called a big prize opening provided in a gaming area of a gaming machine is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds) (for example, An open state), a right to be advantageous to the player, or a condition for winning a prize ball payout.

  Hereinafter, a state in which the prize winning opening is in an open state and winning of a game ball is extremely easy is referred to as a specific gaming state (including a state between rounds). When entering the specific gaming state, for example, the stop symbol pattern of the display symbol displayed on the effect display device becomes a predetermined specific display mode (generally, the stop symbols are aligned in the same symbol).

  During the variable display, the player pays attention to whether or not the mode of the stop symbol becomes the specific display mode and becomes a “hit”. For this reason, various effects are displayed to enhance the game entertainment, such as changing the variation of the symbols, until the symbol is finalized (final stop) so that it can be determined whether or not it will be a “big hit”. Is called.

  As such an effect, for example, in the effect display device, a symbol other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continues for a predetermined time and matches a specific display result. Before the final result is displayed, such as when it is stopped, swinging, enlarged or reduced or deformed, or when multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched. There is a reach effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of big hits is continuing (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states). Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display.

  In general, the game area is formed on the surface of a game board on which plywood boards and the like are stacked. However, a gaming machine in which a gaming area is formed on the surface of a gaming board made of a transparent plate such as a transparent acrylic plate has also been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Hereinafter, a game board formed of a transparent board such as an acrylic board is referred to as a transparent game board. A game board on which plywood boards and the like are laminated is called an opaque game board. In gaming machines equipped with a transparent game board, an effect display device having a relatively large screen is used, and the game effect is enhanced by making the player visually recognize the screen of the effect display device through the transparent game board.

  However, in the case where the screen of the relatively large screen effect display device is made visible through the transparent game board, the area where the accessory is arranged becomes narrow, and an opaque game board is provided. Compared to a gaming machine, the number and size of the objects and decorative members that can be installed in the gaming area are limited. In a gaming machine equipped with a transparent game board, in order to prevent the number of decoration members from being reduced, Patent Document 1 arranges a movable member as a decoration member between the transparent game board and the effect display device. Is also described.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2006-314486 (paragraphs 0150-0152, FIGS. 3 and 12)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the movable member is operated only within an area (display area) corresponding to the screen of the effect display device when operating after a predetermined operating condition is established. Be controlled. That is, the operable region of the movable member is limited to the display region.

  The display area is not the only area that the player can visually recognize on the game board. In particular, in a gaming machine equipped with a transparent game board, an area wider than the display area is visually recognized by the player as a transparent area. The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 includes a movable member, but since the operable region is limited, it is difficult to say that an effect that fully utilizes the transparent region is performed. That is, an effective performance in which the transparent game board and the movable member are moved together is not sufficiently executed.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to increase the effect of the effect of the movable member by effectively utilizing the transparent game board and the movable member in a gaming machine including the transparent game board and the movable member.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming frame that can be opened and closed with respect to an outer frame, has a transparent portion, is attached to the gaming frame, and has a gaming area formed on the front side (for example, A gaming machine having a substantially circular transparent portion 61) that is replaceable and that allows a player to play a predetermined game using a game medium (for example, a game ball). A movable member (for example, rod-shaped rotating bodies 84 and 85) provided on the rear side of the game machine and an opaque member (for example, a decorative member 82) that divides the game area into a plurality of areas, and drives the movable member. The mechanism (for example, the motors 86 and 87) is provided so as to overlap the back side of the opaque member, and the movable member control means for operating the movable member by the driving mechanism (for example, the rotating body control in the production control microcomputer 100). Part (steps S521 and S845B) for controlling the motors 86 and 87 based on the process table including the data, and the movable member control means arranges the movable member on the back side of the opaque member when the operation is stopped (for example, , Executing the processing of steps S901 to S910), a game control means for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting an effect control command for controlling the electric parts for the effect (for example, a game control microcomputer 560); Electric parts for production including the movable member control means and in accordance with the production control command transmitted by the game control means (for example, LEDs 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f of each lamp) Effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) The game control means and the effect control means are mounted on the game board, and the game control means transmits command control commands to the effect control means (for example, in step S29 in the game control microcomputer 560). The effect control means includes an output means (for example, an effect) that outputs a control signal for controlling the electric parts for the effect in a serial signal system based on the effect control command received from the game control means. The control microcomputer 100 includes a portion that executes step S708), converts the control signal input from the output means of the effect control means from the serial signal method to the parallel signal method, and outputs the converted signal to the effect electrical component. A board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit (for example, serial-parallel conversion I provided in the game board) C616 to 619) and a plurality of frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuits (for example, serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615) provided in the game frame, and the board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit has converted into a parallel signal system. A control signal is output to electric parts (for example, LED 125a to 125f and 126a to 126f of lamps) provided on the game board among electric parts for performance, and the plurality of frame side serial-parallel conversion circuits are parallel signal systems. The control signal converted into is output to electrical components provided in the game frame among the electrical components for production (for example, the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 82a to 82d of the lamp), Game frame side relay for relaying connection between a plurality of frame side serial-parallel conversion circuits and effect control means A signal line for control signals to a plurality of frame side serial-parallel conversion circuits that are provided on the game frame and output in a serial signal system by the output means can be attached and detached using a single connector on the game frame side relay board. It is characterized by being connected to.

  An image display device (for example, an effect display device 9) is provided on the back side of the transparent game board and allows the player to visually recognize the screen through the transparent game board. The movable member includes the transparent game board and the image display device. (For example, a space having an interval corresponding to the height of the frame portion 82B between the game board 6 and the back surface of the frame body 81: see FIG. 4). The display member includes a display region (for example, display region “82C”) in which the screen of the image display device can be visually recognized, and a display region outside region (for example, transparent portion 61) outside the display region. The movable member control means may be configured to operate the movable member over the display region and the region outside the display region (see FIG. 10).

  The movable member control means may be configured to dispose the movable member behind the opaque member when the operation is stopped (for example, execute the processes of steps S901 to S910).

  The drive mechanism is a mechanism (for example, motors 86 and 87) that rotates the movable member, and the movable member control means rotates the movable member across the display area and the outside display area by the drive mechanism (FIG. 10). Reference) may be configured.

  The movable member includes a light emitter that can emit light behind the game area (for example, LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d and LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, and 85d) and an initial position sensor (for detecting the initial position of the movable member). For example, position sensors 861, 871) may be provided.

  You may provide the transparency suppression means (for example, colored transparent sheet | seat) which suppresses the transparency of a game area | region.

  Each variable can be identified on the basis that the variable display start condition (for example, the variable display and the big hit game is completed) is satisfied after the variable display execution condition (for example, start winning has occurred) Variable display means (for example, an effect display device 9) for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information and displaying and displaying the display result, which is advantageous for the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display means. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and determines whether or not to control to a specific gaming state before deriving and displaying a variable display result (for example, gaming In the control microcomputer 560, a part for executing the processing of steps S65 and S72) and a Lee for determining whether or not the variable display state of the identification information is set to a predetermined reach state. Based on the determination means (for example, the part that executes the processing of steps S91, S93, S95 to S97 in the game control microcomputer 560), the determination result by the prior determination means, and the determination result by the reach determination means, the identification information A variation pattern type determining means (for example, a part that executes the processing of steps S91 to S94, S98, S99, S101, and S102 in the game control microcomputer 560); The variation pattern determining means for determining the variation pattern of the identification information from the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determining means (for example, the processing of steps S104 and S105 in the game control microcomputer 560). Part to execute) and Corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern determining means, the effect executing means for executing the effect operation including the variable display of the identification information during the variable display of the identification information (for example, steps S501 and S501 in the effect control microcomputer 100). , S517 to 518, S521, S841 to S845F), and the variation pattern type determination means corresponds to the fact that the reach determination means determines that the reach state is not set, and the identification information A plurality of variation pattern types (for example, a variation pattern type (for example, a specific effect of “slip”, “pseudo train”, “intro”, “end of development opportunity”)) including a variation pattern type that executes a specific effect during variable display of Non-reach CA1-1 to CA1-4, CB1-1 to CB1-3, CC1-1 to CC1-3 (see FIG. 36) In other words, the variation pattern determining means is determined that the reach determining means does not enter the reach state, and the variation pattern type determining means is determined to be a variation pattern type for executing a specific effect. Correspondingly, the variation pattern of the identification information is a plurality of types of non-reach variation patterns (for example, variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4 to PA1-7) for executing a specific effect. (See FIG. 27).

  A game board (for example, a game frame) including a game frame (for example, the game frame 11) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, and a predetermined plate-like body and various components attached to the plate-like body. A game control means for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting an effect control command for controlling the electric parts for the effect (for example, game control). Microcomputer 560) and electric parts for production according to the production control command transmitted by the game control means (for example, LEDs 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f of each lamp) Effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100), and the game control means sends an effect control command to the effect control hand. Including a command transmission means (for example, a part for executing step S29 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the effect control means is based on the effect control command received from the game control means. Including output means (for example, the part that executes step S708 in the production control microcomputer 100) that outputs a control signal for controlling the control signal in the serial signal system, and the control signal input from the output means of the production control means A board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit (for example, serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619) provided on a game board and converted into a parallel signal system from a serial signal system and output to an electrical component for production and a game frame Frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit (for example, serial-parallel) The board side serial-parallel conversion circuit further includes an electrical component (for example, LED 125a of the lamp) provided on the game board among the electrical parts for performance. 125f, 126a to 126f), and the frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit converts the control signal converted into the parallel signal system into an electrical component (for example, a lamp LED 281a) provided in the game frame among the electrical components for performance. 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 82a to 82d), and the board side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit are connected via one system wiring. (For example, the relay boards 606 and 607 are connected in a bus type so that they can be connected via one system wiring. Is done. Each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 619 is connected to one system by being connected in a bus format or daisy chain type), and different address information is assigned in advance (for example, the address “ 01 ”to“ 09 ”), and only the control signal to which its own address information is added is converted into a parallel signal system and output (for example, the header / address detection unit 653 is added to the address storage unit 654). If it is determined that it matches the stored address, the data buffer 655 outputs an input capture signal to be latched.) When the output means outputs a control signal for controlling an electrical component provided in the game board, Control signal with address information that can identify the serial-parallel converter circuit (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs serial data to which any of the addresses “06” to “09” shown in FIG. 17 is added to the serial output circuit 353 in steps S953 and S958. When the control signal for controlling the electrical components provided in the game frame is output, the control signal added with address information that can identify the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit is output in the serial signal system. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 transmits the serial data to which any of the addresses “01” to “05” shown in FIG. 16 is added using the serial output circuit 353 in the processing of steps S953 and S958. It may be configured as follows.

  A game board (for example, a game frame) including a game frame (for example, the game frame 11) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, and a predetermined plate-like body and various components attached to the plate-like body. A game control means for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting an effect control command for controlling the electric parts for the effect (for example, game control). Microcomputer 560) and electric parts for production according to the production control command transmitted by the game control means (for example, LEDs 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f of each lamp) Effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100), and the game control means sends an effect control command to the effect control hand. Including a command transmission means (for example, a part for executing step S29 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the effect control means is based on the effect control command received from the game control means. A board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit provided in the game board, including output means for outputting a control signal for controlling the game in a serial signal system (for example, the part for executing step S708 in the production control microcomputer 100) (For example, serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619) and a frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit (for example, serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615) provided in the game frame are further provided. The control signal input from the output means of the control means Al signal system is converted to parallel signal system and output to electrical parts (for example, lamp LEDs 125a to 125f and 126a to 126f) provided on the game board among the electrical parts for performance, and frame side serial-parallel conversion The circuit converts the control signal input from the output means of the effect control means from the serial signal method to the parallel signal method, and among the electric parts for the effect, the electric components provided in the game frame (for example, the LED 281a of the lamp) 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 82a to 82d), and the board side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit, or the production control means and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit Connected via one system wiring (for example, the relay boards 606 and 607 are connected in a bus shape). And are connected through one line of wiring. The serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 may be connected to one system by being connected in a bus form or a daisy chain type.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, the movable member provided on the rear side of the transparent game board and the opaque member that divides the game area into a plurality of areas are provided, and the drive mechanism that drives the movable member is a back surface of the opaque member. Since the movable member control means for moving the movable member by the drive mechanism is provided, the movable member operating in a wide range in the game area can be visually recognized by the player, and transparent. The game board and the movable member can be effectively used to enhance the effect of the moving member. Further, since the movable member control means is configured to dispose the movable member on the back side of the opaque member when the operation is stopped, the movable member that has stopped the operation is prevented from being visually recognized by the player. Only the player can visually recognize it, and the movable member can be prevented from deteriorating the interest of the game.

  The movable member operates in a space formed between the transparent game board and the image display device, and the game region includes a display region in which the screen of the image display device can be viewed, and a display region outside the display region. The opaque member divides the game area into a display area and an area outside the display area, and the movable member control means is configured to operate the movable member over the display area and the area outside the display area. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the movable member that operates in the display region and also operates outside the display region, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the movable member.

  The movable member control means is configured to dispose the movable member behind the opaque member when the operation is stopped, so that the player can not visually recognize the movable member that has stopped the operation, and the player only during the operation The movable member can be prevented from deteriorating the fun of the game.

  The movable member control means is configured to rotate the movable member over the display area and the outside display area by the driving mechanism, so that the movable member continuously operates over the display area and the outside display area. Such an effect can be performed, and the effect of the movable member can be further enhanced.

  When the movable member includes the initial position sensor for detecting the initial position of the movable member, the movable member can be reliably set to the initial setting position.

  By providing the transparency suppressing means that suppresses the transparency of the transparent region, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the effect produced by the light emitter.

  A plurality of types of variation patterns including a variation pattern type for executing a specific effect during variable display of the identification information in response to the determination that the variation pattern type determination unit is not in the reach state by the reach determination unit. The variation pattern determining means is determined to be not reach state by the reach determining means, and the fluctuation pattern type determining means is determined to be a variation pattern type for executing a specific effect. Correspondingly, it is configured to determine the variation pattern of the identification information as one of a plurality of types of non-reach variation patterns for executing a specific effect, without increasing the control burden, Even when the reach state is not set, the types of variation patterns can be increased.

  The electrical control unit includes an output unit that outputs a control signal for controlling the electrical component for production in a serial signal system based on the production control command received from the game control unit, and is provided on the game board When a control signal for controlling the game is output, a control signal added with address information that can identify the board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit is output in a serial signal system to control electrical components provided in the game frame. When the control signal is output, the frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured to output a control signal to which address information that can be specified is added in a serial signal system. The number of wirings can be reduced. Therefore, in the gaming machine in which the game frame and the game board are detachable, it is possible to easily attach and detach the game frame and the game board.

  The effect control means includes an output means for outputting a control signal for controlling the electric parts for the effect in a serial signal system based on the effect control command received from the game control means, and the board side serial-parallel conversion circuit; The frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit or the effect control means and the frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit are configured to be connected via one line of wiring so that the wiring between the game board and the game frame The number can be reduced. Therefore, in the gaming machine in which the game frame and the game board are detachable, it is possible to easily attach and detach the game frame and the game board.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a front view which shows the front of a game frame. It is a front view which shows the front of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of the mechanism part of a game machine. It is a perspective view which shows a decoration member, a motor, and a rotary body. It is a perspective view which shows a motor and a rotary body. (A) is a perspective view which shows a motor and a rotary body, (B) is an enlarged view of the periphery of the connection part of a rotary body and the rotating shaft of a motor. It is a perspective view which shows the other example of the lighting control system of LED provided in the rotary body. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display state of LED when a rotary body rotates. It is a front view which shows the game board of the state in which the motor with which the rotary body was attached was installed in the decoration member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the position at the time of a stationary stationary body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the game frame. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate and an effect control board. FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control board, a relay board, a board side IC board, and a frame side IC board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each input IC. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the format of the serial data output from the microcomputer for production control. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of the input timing of the serial data and clock signal to serial-parallel conversion IC, and the output timing of parallel data. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of each input IC. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eyes, the development chance eyes, and the chances of surprise. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a special symbol display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number value which the microcomputer for production control counts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a left-right output determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a promotion effect execution determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a notice pattern classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a notice pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a notice pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a notice pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an effect control pattern table (design variation pattern table). It is explanatory drawing which shows various effect control pattern tables. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the format of the presentation control command transmitted as a serial data system. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transmission timing of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormal winning notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change promotion effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the control content of the lamp performed according to process data, when each presentation control command is received. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows processing during a big hit game. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect design (decoration design). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation by a rotary body. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of rotary body control data. It is a flowchart which shows a rotary body stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the alerting | reporting screen displayed on a variable display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the aspect of the various error alerting | reporting performed in alerting | reporting control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows alerting | reporting control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a notification start process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the process table for error alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data system in alerting | reporting control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data system in alerting | reporting control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a serial setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows one structural example of the data storage area | region where a lamp control signal and a motor control signal are set. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a serial input / output process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the condition of the display effect in a variable display apparatus, the sound effect by a speaker, and the display effect by each lamp | ramp. It is a block diagram which shows the other structural example of an effect control board, a relay board | substrate, a board | substrate side IC board, and a frame side IC board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate and an effect control board. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating still another configuration example of the effect control board, the relay board, the board side IC board, and the frame side IC board. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the control signal sequence containing the lamp control signal output as a serial data system in alerting | reporting control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a serial setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of 1 structure of the data storage area | region where the control signal sequence containing a lamp control signal and a motor control signal is set. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a serial input / output process. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating still another configuration example of the effect control board, the relay board, the board side IC board, and the frame side IC board. It is a front view which shows the game board in which the movable member was installed. It is a front view which shows the game board in which the movable member was installed.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the front of the game frame. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the front of the game board. FIG. 2 also shows an enlarged view of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 in the front surface of the game frame 11. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out as prizes according to the game. It can also be applied to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2B formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding a game board described later). Is a structure including On the back surface of the glass door frame 2B, components such as a power circuit (not shown) and a speaker 27 are attached to a mechanism plate that constitutes a part of the game frame 11. The mechanism board is provided with a relay board 607 that relays the wiring between the game frame 11 and the game board 6. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 6 is attached to the front frame of the game frame 11 so that attachment or detachment is possible.

  There is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 on the lower surface of the glass door frame 2B. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for launching the game balls are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a substantially circular game area 7 inside the rail is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  The player plays a game by operating the hitting operation handle 5 in order to launch a game ball toward the game area 7. In response to the launching operation, a hitting ball launching device (not shown) launches a game ball. The game ball launched by the hit ball launching device enters the game area 7 through the hit ball rail.

  The plate-like body constituting the game board 6 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate (for example, an acrylic plate) having at least a part of transparency. In the game board 6, a gate (passing gate) 32 is provided on the left side. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a.

  On the back side of the game board 6, an image display device (variable display device) 9 including a plurality of variable display units each variably displaying a decorative pattern for performance is provided. The screen of the effect display device 9 is visible. In the effect display device 9, for example, three decorative symbols “left”, “middle”, and “right” as decorative (effect) symbols are variably displayed, and an effect display is performed. The effect display device 9 performs variable display of decorative symbols during the special symbol variable display period by the special symbol display 8. The effect display device 9 for variably displaying decorative symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer and a drawing processor mounted on the effect control board.

  In the center of the game board 6, a decoration member 82 is installed so as to surround a portion where the variable display of the identification information on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the display effect accompanying the variable display are performed.

  The decorative member 82 is provided with a decorative lamp (center decorative lamp) that is lit or flashed during the game. In this embodiment, six LEDs 125a to 125f are provided as center decoration lamps. In addition, the decoration member 82 is provided with a decoration lamp (stage lamp) that is lit or blinked during the game so as to surround the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, four LEDs 126a to 126d are provided as stage lamps. The decoration member 82A adjacent to the decoration member 82 is also provided with two LEDs 126e and 126f as stage lamps.

  Note that the gate 32, the decorative member 82, and the decorative member 82A are formed of an opaque material. In the game area 7, in the portion where the decorative member 82 is provided and the portion where the decorative member 82A is provided, the player The display screen of the effect display device 9 cannot be visually recognized.

  An opaque member 83 is provided at the lower part of the game area 7. A first start winning opening 13 is provided at the center of the opaque member 83. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a. An opaque member 83 is provided.

  Further, on the left side of the decorative member 82, a variable winning device 15 that forms the second start winning opening 14 in the open state is provided. The winning ball that has entered the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. Further, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16 (a state in which the member is tilted to the left side). When the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the game ball can be won at the second start winning port 14. It is not possible to win a prize in the closed state.

  A special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that is opened by a solenoid 21 in a specific gaming state (big hit state) is provided below the first start winning opening 13. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 has left and right opening and closing members, and the left opening and closing member is tilted to the left side, and the right opening and closing member is tilted to the right side and is controlled to be opened so that a large winning opening (variable winning ball) Device) is open. The winning ball that has won the special variable winning ball device 20 is detected by the count switch 23. Further, an ordinary winning opening 39 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening 13. A game ball won in the normal winning opening 39 is detected by the winning opening switch 39a.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening. Further, the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a may be collectively referred to as a start port switch.

  The opaque region 83 is provided with a special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) that can variably display numbers from 0 to 99, for example. The effect display device 9 performs variable display of decorative symbols as decorative (effect) symbols during the variable symbol variable display period of the special symbol indicator 8.

  The opaque area 83 is provided with four special symbol hold memory indicators 18 for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the start winning openings 13, 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). It has been. The special symbol reservation storage display 18 displays up to four reservation storage numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol hold memory display 18 increases the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 each time there is a start winning in any of the start winning openings 13 and 14. Then, each time the special symbol display 8 starts variable display, the special symbol hold storage indicator 18 reduces the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 (that is, turns off one LED). Specifically, the special symbol hold storage display 18 shifts the lighting state each time variable display is started on the special symbol display 8. In this example, the upper limit number (up to 4) is provided for the starting memory number by winning to the start winning ports 13 and 14, but the upper limit number may be four or more.

  The opaque area 83 is provided with a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols. When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the left and right lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when lit) are turned on alternately to perform variable display. For example, the right side (specifically, the lower right side) is displayed at the end of variable display. If the lamp lights up, it will be a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. The state where the alternate lighting of the left and right lamps is completed and the right lamp is lit is a state where the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. The opaque area 83 is provided with a normal symbol start memory display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have entered the gate 32. Each time the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol start memory display 41 increments the LED to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  Further, at the lower part of the game area 7, there is an out port 26 for absorbing game balls that have not won a prize. Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame lamp, a left frame lamp, and a right frame lamp are provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure in the game area 7. The top frame lamp, the left frame lamp, the right frame lamp, and the decoration LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine. In this embodiment, twelve LEDs 281a to 281l are provided as ceiling lamps. In addition, six LEDs 282a to 282f are provided as left frame lamps. In addition, six LEDs 283a to 283f are provided as right frame lamps. In addition, as decorative LEDs around the structure, one LED 127a is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 20, two LEDs 127b and 127c are provided in the special variable winning ball device 20, and four LEDs 82a are provided in the hitting ball supply tray 3. -82d are provided.

  Further, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as a “card unit”) that enables ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). The card unit includes, for example, a use indicator lamp that indicates whether or not the card unit is in a usable state, a connection table direction indicator that indicates which side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 corresponds to the card unit, When checking the card insertion indicator lamp indicating that the card is inserted, the card insertion slot into which the card as a recording medium is inserted, and the card reader / writer mechanism provided on the back of the card insertion slot A card unit lock is provided to release the unit.

  An operation button 30 that can be pressed by the player is provided at the lower right portion of the gaming machine 1.

  The game balls launched from the hit ball launching device enter the game area 7 through the hit ball rail, and then descend the game area 7. If the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a, it is special if it can start variable display of symbols. The special symbol starts variable display (variation) on the symbol display 8, and the decorative symbol starts variable display (variation) on the effect display device 9. If it is not in a state where the variable display of symbols can be started, the start winning memory number is increased by one.

  The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 9 are stopped when a certain time has elapsed. If the special symbol (stop symbol) at the time of stoppage is a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is released until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol display unit 10 enters a state in which the normal symbol is variably displayed. Further, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. Further, in the probability variation state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the mechanism portion of the gaming machine. The game board 6 having a substantially circular transparent portion 61 is attached to a frame body 81 having a back surface 81a, and an LCD effect display device 9 is installed on the back side of the frame body 81. A frame portion 82 </ b> B corresponding to the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided at the center of the frame body 81. The frame portion 82B protrudes from the back surface of the frame body 81 to the front side of the gaming machine. Accordingly, there is a space having an interval corresponding to the height of the frame portion 82B between the game board 6 and the back surface of the frame 81. In the space, the two rotating bodies (movable members) 84, 85 , Motors 86 and 87 for rotating the respective rotating bodies 84 and 85 are installed. In this embodiment, pulse motors (stepping motors) are used as the motors 86 and 87. In addition, a decorative member 82 </ b> A is installed around the frame 81. The transparent portion 61 of the game board 6 is referred to as a transparent game board.

  Further, the frame portion 82B is provided with a passage portion (notch portion) 82E through which the rotating rotator 84 can pass and a passage portion (notch portion) 82F through which the rotating rotator 85 can pass. . Further, a position sensor 861 is provided in the vicinity of the passage portion 82E, and a position sensor 871 is provided in the vicinity of the passage portion 82F. The position sensors 861 and 871 are, for example, sensors including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. When the rotating bodies 84 and 85 come to the position of the sensor, the light receiving unit cannot receive light from the light emitting unit, thereby rotating. The positions of the bodies 84 and 85 (specifically, having reached the initial position) are detected. The position sensors 861 and 871 are connected to the effect control board 80 by wiring, but the wiring is not shown in FIG.

  Further, on the back surface 81 a of the frame 81, a case 91 that accommodates a signal line that gives a signal to a light emitter (specifically, an LED) provided on the rotating body 84 and a light emission provided on the rotating body 85. A case 92 that accommodates a signal line that gives a signal to the body (specifically, an LED) is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the gate 32 is attached to the transparent portion 61 in the game board 6. A cutout portion 82C corresponding to the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided in the center of the game board 6, and a decorative member 82 is provided around the cutout portion 82C. Further, an opaque member 83 is installed in the lower part of the game board 6. In addition, a name plate 89 displaying a model name, a jackpot probability, the number of winning balls, and the like is attached to the lower right of the game board 6. Hereinafter, the cut-out portion 82C may be referred to as a display area 82C. Further, an area other than the display area 82C in the game board 6 and not covered with an opaque member is referred to as a transparent area (an area where the opaque member is not covered in the transparent portion 61). That is, in the transparent portion 61, an area other than the area covered with the display area 82C and the opaque member is referred to as a transparent area.

  FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the decorative member 82, the motors 86 and 87 attached to the frame body 81, and the rotating bodies 84 and 85. The shape of the substantially rectangular decorative member 82 is a shape having a frame portion 82D around the display region 82C. The motors 86 and 87 correspond to the upper portion and the lower portion of the frame portion 82D in the frame 81. Installed in position. The frame portion 82D has such a width that the player cannot visually recognize the motors 86 and 87 from the front side of the gaming machine, that is, a width that can hide the motors 86 and 87. That is, the motors 86 and 87 are provided so as to overlap the back side of the frame portion 82D.

  FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing the motor 86 and the rotating body 84. (A) shows a state where the rotating body 84 is stationary, and (B) shows a state where the rotating body 84 is rotating. As shown in FIG. 6, the rotating body 84 is a rod-shaped member, one end side is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 86, and four LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d are provided from the other end side. The colors of the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d are different. The configurations of the motor 87 and the rotating body 85 are the same as the configurations of the motor 86 and the rotating body 84. However, the LEDs provided on the rotating body 85 are LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, and 85d.

  7A is a perspective view showing the motor 86 and the rotating body 84. FIG. 7B is an enlarged view of the periphery of the connecting portion between the rotating body 84 and the rotating shaft 86A of the motor 86. FIG. Has been. Signal lines 91 a and 91 b exiting from the case 91 extend to the vicinity of the rotating body 84, bend in the vicinity of the rotating body 84, and in the vicinity of the connection portion between the rotating body 84 and the rotating shaft 86 </ b> A of the motor 86 along the rotating body 84. To. The signal lines 91a and 91b are, for example, copper wires covered with a synthetic resin, but the copper wires are exposed in the vicinity of the connecting portion between the rotating body 84 and the rotating shaft 86A of the motor 86. The signal lines 91a and 91b are connected to the effect control board 80.

  As shown in the AA cross-sectional view in FIG. 7B, the rotating body 84 is provided with two annular conductive members (conductors) 93a and 93b. One conductor 93a is electrically connected to the anodes of the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d inside the rotating body 84. The other conductor 93b is electrically connected to the cathodes of the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d inside the rotating body 84. The tip of the copper wire in the signal line 91a is in contact with the conductive member 93a, and the tip of the copper wire in the signal line 91b is in contact with the conductive member 93b. When the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d are turned on (even when the motor 86 is rotated), the effect control microcomputer sets the signal level of the signal line 91a to a high level and the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d. To allow current to flow through. The signal level of the signal line 91b is set to the ground level on the effect control board 80.

  In FIG. 7, the motor 86 and the rotating body 84 are shown, but the motor 87 and the rotating body 85 are also wired similarly to the motor 86 and the rotating body 84. That is, the rotating body 85 is provided with two annular conductive members (conductors), and one of the conductors is electrically connected to the anodes of the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, and 85d inside the rotating body 85. ing. The other conductor is electrically connected to the cathodes of the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, and 85d inside the rotating body 85. The tip of the copper wire in the signal line is in contact with the conductive member. When the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, and 85d are turned on (also when the motor 87 is rotated), the effect control microcomputer sets the signal level of one of the signal lines to a high level, and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, Current is allowed to flow to 85d.

  FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing another example of the lighting control method of the LEDs 84 a, 84 b, 84 c, 84 d provided on the rotating body 84. In the example shown in FIG. 8, the case 94 is formed so that the tip is positioned in the vicinity of the rotating body 84. Inside the case 94, three light emitting portions such as LEDs are provided, and light from the light emitting portions is emitted toward the rotation shaft 86A of the motor 86 through the hole portions 95a, 95b, and 95c. Inside the rotating shaft 86A of the motor 86, three light receiving portions such as photodiodes are provided. Light enters the light receiving portion through holes 96 a, 96 b, and 96 c provided in the rotation shaft 86 </ b> A of the motor 86. Further, inside the rotator 84, a latch circuit that latches a signal output from the first light receiving unit among the three light receiving units, and the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c when the output of the latch circuit is in an ON state. , 84d, a switch element (for example, a transistor) that allows current to pass therethrough is provided. The latch circuit turns off the output when a signal is output from the second light receiving unit among the three light receiving units. For example, a rotary connector (slip ring) that contacts the rotating body 84 is attached to the rotating shaft 86A, and the current supplied to the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d is supplied to the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d via the rotary connector. Is supplied to a switching element that allows a current to pass through. Further, for example, current is supplied to the rotary connector from the input side (current supply side) of the motor 86. A signal from the light receiving unit is also input to the latch circuit via, for example, a rotary connector. The light emitting part provided in the case 94 is connected to the effect control board 80 by a signal line. The production control microcomputer outputs a signal for turning on the first light emitting unit when the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d are turned on, and turns on the second light emitting unit when turning off the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d. Outputs a signal to light up. In the example shown in FIG. 8, three light emitting units and three light receiving units are provided. For example, the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d are used by using the third light emitting unit and the third light receiving unit. It is possible to perform control such that only any two of them are lit.

  Although the motor 86 and the rotating body 84 are shown in FIG. 8, the same lighting control method as that of the motor 86 and the rotating body 84 can be adopted for the motor 87 and the rotating body 85.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8, a signal for turning on or off the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c and 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c and 85d is transmitted by optical communication. The signal to be transmitted may also be transmitted to the rotators 84 and 85 via the slip ring.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d when the rotating body 84 rotates. The LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d are controlled to blink when the rotating body 84 rotates. That is, turning on and off for a predetermined time is repeated. As shown in FIG. 9A, the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d blink as the rotating body 84 rotates, so that a state like display modes 841, 842, 843, and 844 can be created. For example, the blinking cycle of the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d is shorter as the rotational speed of the rotating body 84 is higher. Moreover, in FIG. 9, a black or gray part shows the state in which LED is lit. In addition, each of the display modes 841, 842, 843, and 844 indicates a case where the rotation speed of the rotating body 84 is different.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 9B to 9E, various display modes can be realized according to the difference in the rotation speed of the rotating body 84 and the blinking cycle of the LEDs. FIG. 9 shows an example of a display state when the rotating body 84 rotates, but the same display can be performed when the rotating body 85 rotates.

  The LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, and 85d receive a current supply from the effect control board 80 via the rod-shaped rotating bodies 84 and 85 and predetermined members.

  In this embodiment, LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d and LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, and 85d are installed as light emitters on the rod-shaped rotating bodies 84 and 85, but light emitters other than LEDs are installed. May be.

  FIG. 10 is a front view showing the game board 6 in a state where the motors 86 and 87 to which the rotating bodies 84 and 85 are attached are installed on the frame body 81. As shown in FIG. 10, the rotators 84 and 85 have the display mode (trajectory) 841, 842, 843, 844 and rotation of the rotator 84 over the display area 82 </ b> C and the transparent area on the game board 6. The display mode (trajectory) 851, 852, 853, 854 of the body 85 is rotated so as to be visible. FIG. 10 shows left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R on the display screen of the image display 9.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the positions of the rotating bodies 84 and 85 when they are stationary. The rotators 84 and 85 are controlled by the effect control microcomputer. When the effect control microcomputer stops the rotation of the rotators 84 and 85, the rod-like rotators 84 and 85 are located in the frame portion 82D. Control is performed so that the player stops the rotating bodies 84 and 85 so that they are not visible from the front side of the gaming machine so as to be positioned at the upper part and the lower part.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the game frame 11 is opened. As shown in FIG. 12, four substrates (frame side IC substrates) 602 to 605 for mounting ICs and the like are attached to the back surface on the game frame 11 side. A frame-side IC board 602 attached to the upper part of the game frame 11 is mounted with serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 for converting serial data into parallel data. A control signal is supplied to the LEDs 281a to 281l. Further, the frame side IC substrate 603 attached to the right side (left side when viewed from the back side) of the game frame 11 is mounted with the serial-parallel conversion IC 613, and the serial-parallel conversion IC 613 passes the LEDs 283 a to 283 f of the right frame lamp. A control signal is supplied. The frame side IC substrate 604 attached to the left side of the game frame 11 (the right side when viewed from the back) is equipped with a serial-parallel conversion IC 614, and the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 passes the LEDs 282a to 282f of the left frame lamp. A control signal is supplied.

  The frame-side IC substrate 605 attached to the lower part of the game frame 11 is equipped with a serial-parallel conversion IC 615 and an input IC 620 for converting parallel data into serial data. A control signal is supplied to each of the LEDs 82 a to 82 d of the dish lamp provided in the (upper dish) 3. In addition, a detection signal from the operation button 30 is input to the input IC 620 in parallel. In addition, the figure which looked at the frame side IC board | substrate 605 from the side is also shown by FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, the frame side IC substrate 602 attached to the upper part of the game frame 11 among the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 is equipped with two serial-parallel conversion ICs. Configured as a collective substrate. With such a configuration, it is possible to consolidate boards on which serial-parallel conversion ICs are mounted, and it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the gaming machine.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12, a relay board 607 is attached to the game frame 11 side, and the wiring from the relay board 607 is connected to the frame side IC board 604, and from the frame side IC board 604 to the frame side IC board 602. The frame side IC substrate 602 is further connected to the frame side IC substrate 603. Further, the wiring from the relay substrate 607 is connected to the frame side substrate 605. Also, the wiring between the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604 and the wiring between the frame side IC substrates 604 and 605 and the relay substrate 607 are connected to the respective substrates using connectors 156a to 156h.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the wiring from the connector 156a of the relay board 607 is connected to the connector 156b of the frame side IC board 604. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 604 is further branched from the connector 156b, one is connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614, and the other is connected to the connector 156c. Further, in the frame side IC substrate 604, the connector 156c is arranged at an end portion on the frame side IC substrate 602 side. The wiring from the connector 156c of the frame side IC substrate 604 is connected to the connector 156d of the frame side IC substrate 602. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 602 is further branched into three from the connector 156d and connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611, the serial-parallel conversion IC 612, and the connector 156e. Further, in the frame side IC substrate 602, the connector 156e is disposed at an end portion on the frame side IC substrate 603 side. The wiring from the connector 156e of the frame side IC substrate 602 is connected to the connector 156f of the frame side IC substrate 603. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 603 is connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613.

  Further, the wiring from the connector 156g of the relay substrate 607 is connected to the connector 156h of the frame side IC substrate 605. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 605 is connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 via the connector 156h.

  FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 13 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. And a serial output circuit for converting parallel data into serial data and outputting the serial data. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that provides detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a special symbol display 8 that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, a special symbol hold memory display 18, and a normal symbol hold memory display 41. Perform display control.

  The serial output circuit 78 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560 is constituted by a shift register or the like. The serial control circuit 78 converts the presentation control command output from the CPU 56 into serial data, and sends it to the presentation control board 80 via the relay board 77. Send. The serial output circuit 78 converts the control signal output from the CPU 56 into serial data, and via the relay board 77, the special symbol display 8, the special symbol hold storage display 18, the normal symbol display 10, and the normal symbol. Output to the on-hold storage display 41. The special symbol display 8, the special symbol hold storage display 18, the normal symbol display 10 and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 are provided with serial-parallel conversion ICs for converting serial data into parallel data, respectively. The control signal from the relay board 77 is converted into parallel data and supplied to the special symbol display 8, the special symbol hold storage display 18, the normal symbol display 10, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Received as a serial data system, display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying decorative symbols is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamps 126a to 126f provided on the game board 6, and is provided on the frame side. The display control of the top frame lamps 281a to 281l, the left frame lamps 282a to 282f, and the right frame lamps 283a to 283f is performed, and the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 has a control for display control of the lamps 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f output by the effect control means. A serial output circuit 353 for converting a signal from parallel data to serial data is mounted. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 is equipped with a serial input circuit 354 that converts the input serial data into parallel data and outputs the parallel data to the effect control means. Therefore, the effect control means outputs the control signal as a serial data system via the serial output circuit 353, thereby controlling the display of each of the lamps 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f. I do.

  On the game board 6 side, a board-side IC board 601 on which a serial-parallel conversion IC for converting serial data into parallel data is mounted. The board side IC substrate 601 is connected to the effect control substrate 80 via the relay substrate 606. On the game frame 11 side, frame-side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, and 605 on which serial-parallel conversion ICs for converting serial data into parallel data are provided. Each frame side IC substrate 602, 603, 604, 605 is connected to the effect control substrate 80 via the relay substrate 606, 607.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the effect control board 80, the relay board 606, and the relay board 607 are connected to each other via a single wiring route in a bus shape.

  FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77 and the effect control board 80. In addition, although the example shown in FIG. 14 shows the case where only the effect control board 80 is provided regarding effect control, you may provide a lamp driver board and an audio | voice output board. In this case, the lamp driver board and the sound output board are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101, a RAM (not shown), a serial output circuit 353, a serial input circuit 354, a clock signal output unit 356 and an input capture signal output unit 357. It is installed. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives an effect control command via the serial input circuit 102 and the input port 103. In this case, the serial input circuit 102 converts the effect control command received as the serial data method into parallel data and outputs the parallel data. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 14 illustrates a diode.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the lamp via the serial output circuit 353. The serial output circuit converts the input signal (parallel data) for driving the LED of the lamp into serial data and outputs the serial data to the relay board 606. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs the sound number data to the speech synthesis IC 173.

  Further, the clock signal output unit 356 outputs a clock signal to the relay board 606. The clock signal from the clock signal output unit 356 is supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 via the relay substrates 606 and 607. The clock signal from the clock signal output unit 356 is supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 and the input IC 621 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 via the relay substrate 606. Therefore, in this embodiment, a common clock signal is supplied to each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 619 and each input IC 621.

  Further, the input capture signal output unit 357 inputs the input capture signal (latch signal) to the board side IC board 601 or the frame side IC boards 602 to 605 via the relay boards 606 and 607 in accordance with the instruction of the effect control CPU 101. Is output. Further, when the input IC 621 mounted on the board side IC board 601 receives an input input signal from the production control microcomputer 100, the detection signals of the position sensors 861 and 871 are latched, and the relay board 606 is used as a serial data system. To the production control microcomputer 100. The position sensors 861 and 871 are sensors for detecting the positions of the rotating bodies 84 and 85.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  FIG. 15 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the effect control board 80, the relay boards 606 and 607, the board side IC board 601, and the frame side IC boards 602, 603, 604, and 605. The effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 outputs a clock signal to the relay board 607 together with serial data as a control signal. In addition, an input capture signal for causing the input IC 621 to latch the input signal is output to the relay board 606.

  The relay board 606 supplies the serial data and the clock signal input from the effect control microcomputer 100 to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC board 601. The serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 convert the input serial data into parallel data, and the LEDs 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 127a to 127c, LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d and motors 86, 87 are supplied.

  Further, the relay board 607 is connected to the relay board 606 through a single wiring route in a bus type, and the serial data line 300 and the clock signal line 301 connected to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 are the board side IC board. 601 is connected in a bus format. The connection to the bus type means that a plurality of serial-parallel conversion ICs or relay boards are connected to one wiring route.

  Each serial-parallel conversion IC 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 has a unique ID. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the ID of IC 616 is 06, the ID of IC 617 is 07, the ID of IC 618 is 08, and the ID of IC 619 is 09.

  In addition, an input IC 621 for inputting detection signals of position sensors 861 and 871 for detecting the positions of the movable members 84 and 85 is mounted on the board side IC substrate 601. In this embodiment, the input IC 621 and the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 include an input signal line 302, a clock signal line 301, and an input capture signal line 303 via a relay board 606. The connected production control microcomputer 100 outputs an input capture signal to the input IC 621 via the relay board 606 at a predetermined timing. Then, the input IC 621 latches the detection signals of the position sensors 861 and 871 based on the input capture signal (latch signal), and outputs it to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the relay board 606. In this case, the input IC 621 converts the detection signal input in parallel from each position sensor into serial data and outputs it. In this embodiment, the unique ID of the input IC 621 is 11, as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the serial data and the clock signal input to the relay board 607 are supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC boards 602 to 605, respectively. And each serial-parallel conversion IC611-615 converts the input serial data into parallel data, and supplies it to each LED281a-281l, 282a-282f, 283a-283f, 82a-82d provided in the game frame 11. .

  The serial data lines and clock signal lines connected to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 are connected in a bus format on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, first, the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 of the frame-side IC board 604 is input, and the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 and the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 and the serial-parallel of the frame-side IC board 602 are input. The signals are input in the order of the parallel conversion IC 612, and further input from the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613 of the frame side IC substrate 603. The serial data line and the clock signal line connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 are directly connected from the relay board 607.

  Each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 615 mounted on each frame side IC substrate 602 to 605 has a unique ID. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the ID of IC 611 is 01, the ID of IC 612 is 02, the ID of IC 613 is 03, the ID of IC 614 is 04, and the ID of IC 615 is 05 It is.

  In addition, an input IC 620 for inputting a detection signal of the operation button 30 provided in the game frame 11 is mounted on the frame side IC substrate 605. In this embodiment, an input signal line, a clock signal line, and an input capture signal line are connected to the input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC board 605 and the production control microcomputer 100 via the relay boards 606 and 607. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs an input capture signal to the input IC 620 via the relay boards 606 and 607 at a predetermined timing. The production control microcomputer 100 outputs the input capture signal to the input IC 620 at a timing different from the timing of outputting the input capture signal to the input IC 621. Then, the input IC 620 latches the detection signal from the operation button 30 based on the input capture signal (latch signal), and outputs it to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the relay boards 606 and 607. In this case, the input IC 620 outputs the detection signal input from the operation button 30 as serial data. In this embodiment, the unique ID of the input IC 620 is 10 as shown in FIG.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the panel-side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame-side IC substrates 602 to 605 are connected via one line of wiring. . Specifically, the connection through one system of wiring means that the relay boards 606 and 607 are connected in a bus type, and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 are connected in a bus type or a daisy chain type. It is that. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 are connected in a bus type. As described above, in this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are provided. These are connected through a single line of wiring using connectors via relay boards 606 and 607. Therefore, the wiring work between the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be performed simply by attaching and detaching the connector, and the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be attached and detached more easily.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605, and the input IC 621 are A common clock signal is input from the production control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the wiring of the clock signal to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 and the wiring of the clock signal to the input IC 621 can be made common, and communication between the effect control means and the board-side IC 601 board, and effect control Communication between the means and the frame-side IC substrates 602 to 605 can be realized using one channel, respectively, and the number of wirings can be reduced. Further, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605, and the input IC 621 can be easily synchronized. In addition, the number of wiring lines for clock signals can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, addresses are assigned in advance to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619, and the production control microcomputer 100 adds addresses to the serial data when outputting the control signal converted into serial data. And output. When each serial-parallel conversion IC 611-619 inputs serial data, it checks whether the address added to the input serial data matches its own address, and if it matches, converts it to parallel data. To supply (ie, output) each LED. If the addresses do not match, supply to each LED is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the production control microcomputer 100 performs bidirectional communication with the board-side IC board 601 and the frame-side IC boards 602 to 605 (specifically, serial data is converted into serial-parallel conversions). IC 611 to 619 and an input signal is input from the input IC 621). Therefore, a data input terminal and a data output terminal are provided, and data input and data output can be performed in one channel. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the data input terminal and data output terminal of one channel are different from each other in output target device (in this example, serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619) and input target device ( In this example, it is connected to the input IC 621). With such a configuration, when the output target device and the input target device are originally different devices, the communication should be performed using different channels in both directions. Communication is performed to reduce the number of channels between the effect control microcomputer 100, the board-side IC board 601 and the frame-side IC boards 602 to 605.

  In this embodiment, the channel is a terminal for a data line (output data line), a clock signal line, an input signal line (input data line), and an input take-in signal line (signal line for input data read request). Is a set. One channel may include a ground wire or a terminal dedicated to the power source. Further, in this embodiment, a case where both data input and data output are performed using one channel is shown, but an output-dedicated channel in which only a terminal for a data line (output data line) and a clock signal line is set. May be used. Alternatively, an input-only channel in which only terminals for input signal lines (input data lines) and input take-in signal lines (input data read request signal lines) are set may be used.

  FIGS. 16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams illustrating examples of addresses given to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the addresses of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 in a predetermined address storage area previously provided in the RAM.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, in the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605, an address 01 is assigned to the IC 611, and an address is assigned to the IC 612. 02 is given, address 03 is given to IC613, address 04 is given to IC614, and address 05 is given to IC615. Further, in the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, the address 006 is assigned to the IC 616, the address 07 is given to the IC 617, the address 08 is given to the IC 618, and the IC 619 is given to the IC 619. Address 09 is given.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 may be given the same ID as the unique ID of the IC as an address, or may be given an address including numbers, characters, and symbols different from the unique ID of the IC. Good.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 whose address is 01 converts the serial data into parallel data, and realizes the ceiling frame lamp of the game frame 11 (in this example, the ceiling frame). Six lamps (281a to 281f) of the lamps 281a to 281l are supplied. Further, the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 whose address is 02 converts serial data into parallel data, and realizes a top frame lamp of the game frame 11 (in this example, six other LEDs (top frame lamps 281a to 281l) ( 281 g to 281 l)). The serial-parallel conversion IC 613 whose address is 03 converts serial data into parallel data, and supplies the parallel data to an LED (in this example, six LEDs (283a to 283f)) that realizes the right frame lamp. Further, the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 whose address is 04 converts serial data into parallel data, and supplies the parallel data to LEDs (in this example, six LEDs (282a to 282f)) that realize the left frame lamp.

  Further, the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is 05 converts the serial data into parallel data, and realizes a dish lamp provided on the hitting supply tray 3 of the game frame 11 (in this example, four LEDs (82a to 82a ~ 82d)).

  The serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is 06 converts serial data into parallel data, and supplies the parallel data to motors 86 and 87 for driving the rotators 84 and 85. The serial-parallel conversion IC 617 whose address is 07 converts serial data into parallel data, and realizes each lamp of a decorative structure (center decoration) provided in the center of the game board 6 (6 LEDs ( 125a to 125f)). The serial-parallel conversion IC 618 whose address is 08 converts serial data into parallel data, and converts the serial data into LEDs (six LEDs (126a to 126f)) that realize each stage lamp provided around the effect display device 9. Supply. The serial-parallel conversion IC 619 whose address is 09 is an LED (three LEDs (127a to 127c)) that converts serial data into parallel data and realizes a lamp provided around the winning prize opening (attacker). The LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c and 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c and 85d provided on the rotating bodies 84 and 85 are supplied. In addition, LED which implement | achieves a lamp may be called LED of a lamp. Further, one signal line and a ground (ground) line are connected to the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d, and one signal line and a ground (ground) line are connected to the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, and 85d. .

  In this embodiment, each input IC 620, 621 is also given an address in advance. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of addresses given to the input ICs 620 and 621. The production control microcomputer 100 stores the addresses of the input ICs 620 and 621 in a predetermined address storage area provided in advance in the RAM. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, the address 10 is assigned to the input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC board 605, and the address 11 is assigned to the input IC 621 mounted on the board side IC board 601. Yes. The input IC 621 may be given the same ID as the unique ID of the IC, or may be given an address including numbers, characters, and symbols different from the unique ID of the IC.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the input IC 620 whose address is 10 inputs a detection signal (a signal indicating that the operation button 30 is provided) provided in the game frame 11 and outputs it as serial data. The input IC 621 whose address is 11 inputs the detection signals of the position sensors 861 and 871 for detecting the positions of the rotating bodies 84 and 85 in parallel, converts them into serial data, and outputs them.

  FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the configuration of each serial-parallel conversion IC 611-619. As illustrated in FIG. 19, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 include a data latch unit 651, a shift register 652, a header / address detection unit 653, a data buffer 655, and a sync driver 656.

  The data latch unit 651 includes, for example, a latch circuit. When serial data is input, the data latch unit 651 latches the input data bit by bit at the rising timing of the clock signal pulse and outputs the latched data to the shift register 652. The shift register 652 sequentially stores data input bit by bit from the data latch unit 651. The shift register 652 shifts stored data bit by bit at the rising timing of the pulse of the clock signal. By repeatedly shifting the stored data bit by bit as described above, the data finally input as serial data (that is, in a serial manner) is stored in the shift register 652.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the format of serial data output from the production control microcomputer 100. FIG. FIG. 20A shows a data format of serial data output as lamp lighting data for individually lighting or extinguishing the LEDs of each lamp provided on the game board 6 or the game frame 11. FIG. 20B shows the format of serial data output as a reset command for resetting the LEDs of the respective lamps provided on the game board 6 and the game frame 11 to turn them off.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, the lamp lighting data is composed of 28 bits, and includes 9-bit header data, mark bits (M), 8-bit addresses, 8-bit data, and end bits (E). .

  The header data represents the beginning of the data, and is 1FF (H) in the example shown in FIG. The mark bit (M) is a bit (logical value 0) representing a data delimiter, and is inserted between the header data and the address and between the address and the data. The address is the address of the data-output destination serial-parallel conversion IC. An ID that is a unique serial number of each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 may be used as the address.

  The data (8 bits) is for controlling the lighting state of the LED of each lamp, and includes, for example, a logical value 1 as a bit corresponding to the LED of the lamp to be lit, Corresponding bits contain the logical value 0. The end bit (E) indicates the end of data and has a logical value of 0.

  As shown in FIG. 20B, the reset command is composed of 19 bits, and includes 9-bit header data, mark bits (M), 8-bit reset data, and end bits (E).

  The header data represents the beginning of the data, and is 1FF (H) in this example. Note that (H) indicates a hexadecimal number. The mark bit (M) is a bit (logical value 0) representing a data delimiter, and is inserted between the header data and the reset data. The reset data is for resetting the lighting states of the LEDs of the respective lamps so that all the lamps are extinguished. For example, the reset data is all data including the logical value 1. The end bit (E) indicates the end of data, and is a logical value 0 in this example.

  In this embodiment, the lamp lighting data shown in FIG. 20A or the reset command shown in FIG. 20B is input, and the shift register 652 is repeatedly shifted bit by bit at the rising edge of the clock signal pulse. Will be stored.

  The header / address detector 653 detects the header and address from the data stored in the shift register 652. First, the header / address detection unit 653 constantly detects data from the shift register 652, and confirms whether or not the content of the detected data matches 1FF (H) corresponding to the header data. If it matches the header data (1FF (H)), it is determined that the position matching the header data is the head of the data, and it is determined that one set of lamp lighting data or reset command is stored in the shift register 652. Next, the header / address detection unit 653 detects the 11th to 18th bits of data from the head corresponding to the address from the shift register 652, and whether or not it matches the address previously given to the serial-parallel conversion IC. To check. The board side IC board 601 and the frame side IC boards 602 to 605 are provided with, for example, an address storage register 654 that stores the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC to be mounted, and the header / address detector 653 is a shift register. It may be confirmed whether the address detected from 652 matches the address stored in the address storage register 654 in advance. If the addresses match, the header / address detection 653 determines that data destined for the serial-parallel conversion IC has been input, and outputs an input capture signal (latch signal) to the data buffer 655. If the addresses do not match, the header / address detection 653 does not output the input capture signal to the data buffer 655. That is, in this case, since the data is not destined for the serial-parallel conversion IC, the data stored in the shift register 652 is discarded without being output to the data buffer 655.

  FIG. 19 shows a case where the address storage register 654 is provided in advance on the board side IC board 601 and the frame side IC boards 602 to 605, but instead of the address storage register 654, serial- An address is provided from an external hardware circuit (for example, a circuit mounted on the effect control board 80) via an address terminal (8 terminals (corresponding to each bit of an 8-bit address)) provided in the parallel conversion IC. May be input. Then, an address may be input to the serial-parallel conversion IC by controlling the input of each address terminal to high (high level) or low (low level) from the external hardware circuit side. In this case, for example, the external hardware circuit makes the input to the terminal high by applying a voltage to the terminal corresponding to any bit of the address, or makes the input to the terminal low by switching to the ground. Control to do.

  The data buffer 655 is constituted by, for example, a latch register. When an input capture signal is input from the header / address detection unit 653, the 20th to 27th bit data from the head corresponding to the data portion is captured from the shift register 652. Latch with. The data buffer 655 supplies (that is, outputs) the fetched data as parallel data (Q0 to Q7) to the LED of each lamp.

  If the data stored in the shift register 652 is a reset command, the 11th to 18th bits from the beginning all store data having a logical value of 1. In this case, the data buffer 655 determines that a reset command has been input when all data having a logical value of 1 is fetched, and the LEDs of all the lamps are reset and turned off.

  The sync driver 656 inverts and outputs the logical value of the parallel data output from the data buffer 655 based on a predetermined logic inversion setting signal, or outputs it as it is. For example, when the predetermined logic inversion setting signal is high, it turns on when the bit value of the parallel data output from the data buffer 655 is 1 (that is, the corresponding bit value of the lamp lighting data is 1), An ON signal is output to the LED of each lamp. In this embodiment, the set value of the logic inversion setting signal is set in advance in a register or the like provided on the panel side IC board 601 or each frame side IC board 602 to 605, and the LED of each lamp is set according to the preset setting value. It is assumed that an ON signal is outputted to the LED of each lamp.

  FIG. 21 is a timing diagram showing an example of input timing of serial data and clock signals to the serial-parallel conversion IC and output timing of parallel data. In FIG. 21, a case where lamp lighting data is input as a serial data method will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, serial data is input to the shift register 652 of the serial-parallel conversion IC in units of 1 bit in the order of header data, mark bits, addresses, mark bits, data, and end bits. The series of data is set as one set. The header / address detection unit 653 does not detect header data until one set of serial data (in this example, lamp lighting data) has been input, so the output of the data buffer 655 does not change. Therefore, the lighting pattern based on the previously received serial data is output as it is as a parallel data system from the serial-parallel conversion IC.

  When all sets of serial data have been input, the data portion from the data stored in the shift register 652 is latched in the data buffer 655, and a lighting pattern based on the newly received serial data is output as a parallel data system. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, among the parallel data output from the serial-parallel conversion IC, Q0 and Q4 are the rising timing of the pulse of the next clock signal after completion of the serial data input. Immediately, the data is switched to new lighting pattern data. Q1 and Q5 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of one clock from Q0 and Q4. Q2 and Q6 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of two clocks from Q0 and Q4. Further, Q3 and Q7 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of three clocks from Q0 and Q4.

  FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of each of the input ICs 620 and 621. As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, each of the input ICs 620 and 621 is composed of a plurality (eight in this example) of D flip-flops 661 to 668. In this embodiment, detection signals from the operation buttons 30 or the position sensors 861 and 871 are input in parallel to the input ICs 620 and 621, and are input to any of the D flip-flops 661 to 668 for each detection signal. A clock signal is input to each of the D flip-flops 661 to 668, and each D flip-flop 661 to 668 sequentially performs a shift operation at the rising edge of the clock. The detection signals input in parallel are converted into serial data and output.

  Each D flip-flop 661 to 662 receives an input capture signal (latch signal) from the effect control microcomputer 100 at a predetermined timing. When an input capture signal is input, detection signals from the position sensors 861 and 871 are latched by the D flip-flops 661 to 662, respectively. The latched detection signal is sequentially shifted at the rising edge of the clock and output as a serial data system.

  In this embodiment, the control signal is output from the production control microcomputer 100 to each LED side through one wiring route, that is, the control signal is output as a serial signal. A control signal may be individually output to each LED side.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the gaming machine is turned on and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether the contents of the program are valid. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is interrupted. It is a mode that indicates a cover address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15, including steps S44 and S45).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process. In this example, if “55H” is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (ON state), and if a value other than “55H” is set, it means that there is no backup (OFF state).

  After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs a data check of the backup RAM area (parity check in this example) (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process (step S43). In the gaming state recovery process, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a power failure recovery command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery. Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S29).

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, initial values are set for flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a total prize ball number storage buffer and a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an initialization designation command for initializing the sub board to the sub board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets an abnormality notification prohibition flag (step S44) and sets a value corresponding to the prohibition period value in the prohibition period timer (step S45). The prohibition period value is a value indicating a period during which an abnormal winning notification described later is prohibited. The abnormality notification prohibition flag is a flag indicating that notification of an abnormal winning is prohibited, and is maintained in the set state until the prohibition period timer times out. Therefore, the start of the abnormal winning notification is prohibited for a predetermined period after the initialization notification is started in the effect display device 9.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). The display random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a big hit determination random number generation counter). A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In a process to transmit, a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game device control process), the count value of the jackpot determination random number generation counter or the like is one round (a jackpot determination random number generation counter or the like) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value that can be taken, the initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S36 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the gate switches 32a and 32b, the start port switches 13a and 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switch 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, and the state determination is performed (switch processing: step) S21).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes display control processing for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 (step S22). For the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in the processing of steps S34 and S35.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process for notifying an abnormal winning when it detects that a game ball has won a prize winning opening at a time other than the regular time (abnormal winning notifying process: step S23).

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S24). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S25 and S26).

FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): In response to the variable display of special symbols based on the winning of game balls (starting winnings) at the starting winning holes 13, 14, it is determined whether or not to generate a big hit or a small hit ( (For big hit judgment)
(2-1) Random 2-1 (MR2-1): Determines the type of jackpot (probability big hit, sudden probability change big hit, normal big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2-2) Random 2-2 (MR2-2): Determines whether or not to reach (for reach determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(6) Random 6 (MR6): The initial value of random 1 is determined (for determining the initial value of random 1)
(7) Random 7 (MR7): Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the initial value of random 5)

  In step S24 in the game control process shown in FIG. 24, the game control microcomputer 560 uses (1) a big hit determination random number, (2-1) a big hit type determination random number, and (5) a normal symbol. A counter for generating a hit determination random number is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (MR2-2, MR3, MR4) or initial value random numbers (MR6, MR7). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than the random number of said (1)-(7). In this embodiment, the big hit determination random number is a software random number generated based on a program by the game control microcomputer 560. However, as the big hit determination random number, hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560 is used. Alternatively, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 may be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). In the special symbol process, the corresponding symbol is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a winning ball process for setting the number of winning balls based on the detection signals of the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23 and the winning port switch 39a (step S31). Specifically, in response to detection of winning based on any of the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switch 39a being turned on, the winning control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 37 receives a prize ball. A payout control command indicating the number is output. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls. In the prize ball process, a process for determining whether or not a prize ball error has occurred is also performed. For example, when there is a discrepancy between the set value of the number of prize balls and the actual number of payouts, the CPU 56 determines that a prize ball error has occurred, and causes the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 to Control is performed to transmit a prize ball error notification designation command designating notification of occurrence of a prize ball error.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes an error detection process based on the detection signal of the full tank switch, the ball break switch, and the door opening sensor 157 (see FIG. 12) (step S32). Specifically, in response to the detection signal of the full tank switch provided inside the lower plate 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 is notified that a full tank error has occurred. A full error notification designation command for designating the transmission is transmitted. Further, in response to a detection signal from a ball break switch provided on the upper part of the ball payout device 97, the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 is notified that a ball break error has occurred. A ball break error notification designation command is transmitted to designate this. In response to the detection signal of the door opening sensor 157, a door opening error notification designation command for designating notifying that the door opening error has occurred is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. To do.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S33: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S34). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 performs variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S35). For example, when the start flag for normal symbol variation is set, the CPU 56 changes the display state (left side lighting and right side lighting) every 0.2 seconds until the end symbol is set. In the case of the speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating left side lighting and 0 indicating right side lighting) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S36), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S35 (excluding step S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  Next, display effects in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described. In the special symbol display 8, when a predetermined time elapses after the variable symbol special symbol display is started, the special symbol variable symbol display result is stopped (derived display). If it is decided to win, a special special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed. When it is decided to make a small hit, a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is determined to be off, special symbols other than the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are stopped and displayed. When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In this embodiment, as an example, the numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are big hit symbols, the numbers indicating “5” are small hit symbols, and the symbol indicating “−” is an off symbol. To do.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are the jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are the 15 round jackpot symbols. . The special symbol indicating the number “1” is made a big hit symbol for two rounds. When the 15-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display, the open / close plate in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 generates a predetermined number (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls. During the period until the game is started, a round is started in which the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of rounds is the first number (for example, 15). Hereinafter, the jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds is the first number is also referred to as 15 rounds jackpot state.

  In addition, when the 2-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display, the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state (two-round jackpot state) in which the number of rounds is the second number (for example, “2”). In the 2 round big hit state, the period of each round becomes a short second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) due to the first period in the 15 round big hit state. In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) which is smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In addition, in the two round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the big winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. It suffices to be controlled. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous to the player to the first state which is advantageous to the player. The second state may be restored after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state after the big hit gaming state is ended, the special symbol stop symbol is “3”. In the short time state, the variation time of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol is shortened compared to the normal state (the state that is not the probability variation state or the short time state). The time-short state is, for example, when one of the conditions is satisfied first, that is, the variable display of a special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit”. To finish. In addition, after the big hit state that is executed after the special symbol showing the number “3” of 15 rounds as a stop symbol in the variable symbol special display is stopped and displayed, the normal state is not set. It may be made to become. The jackpot symbol that is derived and displayed when the game is controlled to the short-time state or the normal state after the jackpot gaming state is finished is called a normal jackpot symbol or a non-probable variable jackpot symbol (non-probable variation symbol).

  If the game state is decided to be controlled to the probable state after the big hit game state is ended, the special symbol stop symbol becomes “7”. The probability variation state continues until, for example, a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result. In addition, when one of the conditions is established first, the variable display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result, The probability variation state may be terminated. Further, a special symbol stop symbol derived and displayed when it is determined to control the gaming state to the probability variation state is referred to as probability variation big hit symbol or probability variation symbol.

  Even after the two-round big hit state is over, the gaming state is controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). The probability variation state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state is also referred to as a sudden probability variation (surprise) state.

  When the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 8, the gaming state is controlled to a small winning gaming state different from the big winning gaming state. In the small hit gaming state, as in the two round big hit state, the open / close plate in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in the open state for the second period, and the big winning opening is opened. The number of rounds is the second number (for example, 2). However, unlike the two round big hit state, the gaming state is not changed. That is, the gaming state before being controlled to the small hit gaming state continues. However, when it is decided to end the probability change state or the time-short state, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state after the small hit gaming state is ended. In addition, when changing the winning ball apparatus provided separately from the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round in the two round big hit state to the first state, the same as in the case of the two round big hit state even in the small hit gaming state Then, the winning ball apparatus is changed to the first state.

  Further, in the probability variation state, the probability of determining the big hit is higher than in the low probability state (normal state). For example, it is 10 times. Specifically, in the probability variation state, the number of determination values determined to be a big hit when it matches the value of the random number for jackpot determination is 10 times that in the normal state. In addition, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased. That is, the second start winning opening 14 is easy to open, and a start winning is likely to occur. Specifically, in the probability variation state, the number of determination values determined to be a hit when it matches the value of the random number for normal symbol determination is larger than that in the normal state. Further, in addition to increasing the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol, the number of times or the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, or the number of times and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. You may increase. Further, even in the short time state, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, the number of opening or the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, and the number of opening and opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased. You may spend more time.

  In the display area of the effect display device 9, variable display of decorative symbols is performed corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the special symbol display 8. That is, in the display area of the effect display device 9, the variation of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R based on the fact that the variable display start condition is satisfied. Is started, for example, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (derived display) in the order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. Note that the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in a predetermined order in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, or each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbols. The stop symbols may be stopped and displayed simultaneously in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R.

  During the period (variable display period) from when the variable display of decorative symbols is started until the stop symbol is derived and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R The variable display state of symbols may be a predetermined reach state. The reach state is a display state in which the decorative symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, or This is a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect).

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach effect, it is possible that the variable display state of decorative designs may be in the reach state and that the variable display result may be a big hit design. A specific effect may be executed for notifying the player by a variable display mode of the symbol. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo train”, “intro”, “expansion chance”, “end of development opportunity” can be executed.

  In the specific effect of “sliding”, two or more symbol display areas (for example, “left”) are displayed after the decorative symbols are changed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In addition, after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the symbol display areas of the temporarily stopped symbols are displayed. The decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed by changing the decorative symbol again after changing the decorative symbol again (for example, one or both of the “left” symbol display area 9L and the “right” symbol display area 9R). An effect display is performed. In addition, to notify the player that the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed will not be finalized (final stop) by, for example, displaying fluctuations in the temporary stop display or changing the decorative symbol again after a short temporary stop. Is preferred. Alternatively, the decorative design may be changed again after the decorative design is temporarily stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped and displayed is confirmed.

  In the special effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the decorative symbols are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R based on the fact that the start condition of the variable symbol variable display is satisfied once. After the symbol is changed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo continuous variation) in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. The display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times).

  FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing pseudo-continuous opportunities, development opportunities, and chances of surprise. For example, in the specific effect of “pseudo ream”, any one of the spurious chance chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. Are temporarily stopped and displayed. The “left symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the “middle symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “middle” symbol display area 9C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of decorative symbols included in the special combination.

  In the specific effect of “Intro”, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the symbols are confirmed in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (final stop display), for example, a predetermined effect display such as an introduction part of the effect display performed in the reach effect is performed.

  In the specific development of “Development Opportunity”, all symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are changed after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. , After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols constituting the development opportunity included in the predetermined special combination, the predetermined reach effect is started with the variable display state of the decorative symbols in the reach state. For example, in the specific effect of “Development Chance”, any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 26B in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right”. Are temporarily stopped and displayed. When any one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, or the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. The player's expectation is enhanced.

  In the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, all symbol display areas 9L, 9C, In 9R, an effect display is performed in which a combination of decorative symbols predetermined as development opportunities is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). For example, in the specific effect “end of development opportunity”, any of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect “development opportunity” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  Further, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the specific effect, for example, a display pattern other than the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image, A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may become a reach state and that the variable display result may become a big hit symbol. In this embodiment, notice effects such as “character display”, “step-up image”, and “mail display” are executed.

  In the “character display” notice effect, the decorative symbols are changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then two or more symbol display areas (for example, “ In the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9R), before the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed, an effect display is performed in which a character image prepared in advance is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 9. .

  In the “step-up image” notice effect, the decorative symbols are changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in two or more symbol display areas. Is temporarily displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, an effect display is performed in which a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, and then the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched.

  In the notice display of “mail display”, the decorative symbols are changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in two or more symbol display areas. Before the temporary stop display is performed, for example, an effect display in which the effect operation changes such as changing the display of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  When the special symbol display 8 and the effect display device 9 are displayed in a stopped manner, the decorative symbol variable display state does not reach the reach state after reaching the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the reach is not reached. One of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 may be stopped and displayed among a predetermined decorative symbol combination or a special decorative symbol combination. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) variable display mode when the variable display result is an out-of-order design.

  When the special symbol display 8 and the effect display device 9 are stopped and displayed in a stopped state, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state after the variable symbol display is started. After the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a combination of predetermined decorative symbols that do not become reach may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when “3”, which is a normal jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 8, after the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state and the reach effect is executed. Or the reach effect is not executed, and the symbol numbers are even numbers “2”, “4”, “L”, “C”, “R” in the effect display device 9 in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. Any one of the decorative symbols “6” and “8” is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are referred to as normal big hit symbols (“non-probability variable symbols”) of decorative symbols. The decorative display variable display mode in which the normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “normal” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) variable display mode.

  When “7”, which is a probabilistic big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 8, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, or the reach effect is executed. Instead, the symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R of “left”, “middle”, “right” in the effect display device 9. Any one of the decorative symbols that are "" is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” are referred to as probability variation big hit symbols or probability variation symbols.

  Corresponding to the fact that the stop symbol in the variable display of the special symbol becomes the probability variation big hit symbol ("7" which is the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped on the special symbol display), the variable symbol display result of the decorative symbol is After the reach effect similar to the reach effect executed in the case of a normal jackpot symbol is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the decorative display variable display mode in which the probability variable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed is “ This is referred to as a “variable display mode”.

  When “7”, which is a probabilistic big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 8, after the variable symbol display state is the reach state, the variable symbol display result is usually the big hit symbol The variable display mode of the decorative design in which the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed after the reach performance different from the executed reach performance is executed is referred to as a “second probability change” variable display mode. In this way, it is referred to as a “second probability variation” variable display mode.

  When “7”, which is a probabilistic big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 8, after the variable symbol display state is the reach state, the variable symbol display result is usually the big hit symbol After the reach effect similar to the reach effect to be executed is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the decorative display variable display mode in which the normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is the variable display mode of “third probability change”. That's it. In addition, although the big hit symbol is usually derived and displayed on the effect display device 9, the gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state.

  When the decorative symbol variable display mode is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, the probability variation big winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9, but the decorative symbol variable display mode is “third probability variation”. ”, The big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9. When the variable display mode is “third probability variation”, the player cannot recognize from the variable symbol display result of the decorative symbol whether or not the probability variation state is set. In other words, the combination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol for the probability variation big hit is always used when the probability variation state is controlled. However, the combination of the stop symbol of the normal jackpot decorative symbol is used both when the probability variation state is not controlled and when the probability variation state is controlled.

  When the special symbol indicator 8 is stopped and displayed as “2”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and the predetermined display symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9. 26, a stop symbol that becomes one of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 26B is stopped, or a stop symbol that becomes any one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. Stopped display. Note that the chance chances TC1 to TC4 are determined in advance as combinations of decorative symbols included in the special combination. In addition, when “2”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 8, a predetermined reach effect is executed after reaching the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol, A stop symbol that is a combination of predetermined reach (for example, that the stop symbols in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R match) is stopped on the effect display device 9 without performing the effect. May be displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “1”, which is the two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicator 8 is “surprise” (also referred to as “surprise probability big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”). This is referred to as a variable display mode.

  When “5”, which is a small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 8, in the effect display device 9, the decorative symbol variable display is performed in the same manner as when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “accuracy”. Is performed, a stop symbol of a predetermined non-reach combination (for example, the stop symbols in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R do not match) is stopped or displayed. There are cases where the stop symbols of any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 26 (B) are stopped and displayed, or the stop symbols that are combinations of predetermined reach are stopped and displayed. As described above, the display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 8 is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. Note that the stop symbol of any one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 26C is used only when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “surprise”, and the variable display mode is “small hit”. If it becomes, it will not be stopped. In other words, when any stop symbol of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbols, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result in the variable display mode of “probability”.

  When the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal”, “first probability variation”, or “third probability variation”, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the promotion effect during variation as the specific variation display is executed. May be. In the fluctuating promotion effect, after the normal jackpot symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9, for example, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the same decorative symbols are changed again to change, and the decorative symbol that is a probabilistic big hit combination and the normal big hit combination Stop or display one of the symbols (final stop display). When the changing promotion mode is executed when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or “third probability change”, the temporarily changing display of the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped is used as the changing promotion effect. A promotion promotion failure during change is performed to stop and display the jackpot symbol. When the variable display mode is “first probability change”, when the changing promotion effect is executed, as the changing promotion effect, a change in which the probabilistic big hit symbol is stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is changed again. Medium promotion success production is performed.

  When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is either “normal” or “third probability change”, the variable display result is stopped and displayed. After being controlled to the round big hit state, during the period until the 15th round big hit state is finished, the promotion effect during the big hit is executed as a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probability variation state. The timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be before the first round in the 15 round jackpot state starts after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or any round in the 15 round jackpot state. Or during the period from the end of any round in the 15 round jackpot state to the start of the next round, or the final round in the 15 round jackpot state It may be during the period from the end of the game to the start of the next variable display game. In addition, during the first special symbol or decorative symbol change after the end of the 15th round big hit state, an effect operation corresponding to the big hit promotion effect may be performed. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as an “ending promotion effect”.

  The jackpot promotion effect is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state will be probabilistic even though the stop symbol is usually a jackpot symbol, and that there is no promotion that will be probable There is a directing failure production during the jackpot. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, and one of the normal symbol and the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. Then, in the big hit middle promotion failure production, the normal big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the production display result, and in the big hit middle promotion promotion production, the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the production display result. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect image indicating the roulette game is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9. Then, in the big hit mid-promotion failure production, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette enters the “even number” and displays an effect image that displays “Sorry!”, And in the big hit mid-promotion successful production, it is thrown into the rotating roulette. The ball is placed in an “odd number” and an effect image “Probability!” Is displayed.

  When “7” is stopped as a stop symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the variable display result becomes a big hit symbol in the variable display mode of “third probability variation”, the big hit is not made until the big hit gaming state is finished. By executing the middle promotion success production, it is notified that there is a promotion that is in a certain change state. When “3” is displayed as a stop symbol on the special symbol display 8, the promotion success success during the jackpot is not executed until the jackpot gaming state is ended, and there is no notification that there is a promotion to be in a probable change state. .

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is no jackpot promotion success effect that notifies that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probable state even though the stop symbol is a combination of the normal jackpot symbol, and there is no promotion that becomes a probable state There is a promotion promotion failure during jackpot. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result. In the big hit mid-promotion failure production, the normal symbol may be stopped and displayed as the production display result, and in the big hit mid-rise promotion success production, the probability variation design may be stopped and displayed as the production display result. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect image indicating the roulette game is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9. And in the jackpot promotion failure production, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette enters “Even” and displays the production image “Sorry!”, And in the jackpot promotion promotion production, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette An effect image that displays “Odd” and “Probability!” Is displayed. When “7” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 8 and the variable display result becomes a big hit symbol in the variable display mode of “third probability change”, the big hit is promoted until the big hit gaming state ends. By executing the successful performance, it is notified that there is a promotion that is in a probable state. When “3” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 8 and the variable display result becomes a big hit symbol in the “normal” variable display mode, the big hit during the big hit gaming state is completed. Is not executed, and there is no notification that there is a promotion to be in a probable state.

  FIG. 27 shows a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows. As shown in FIG. 27, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-7 and non-reach PB1- are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-8, super PB3-1 to super PB3− are the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. 5. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared.

  FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. As shown in FIG. 28, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 and super PA4-1 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -Super PA4-8, Super PA5-1 to Super PA5-4, Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-4, Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-4, Super PC4-1 and Super PC4-2, Super PD1-1 And Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 and Super PE1-2, Super PF1-1 to Super PF1-3, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-4, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-3, Special PG3-1 ~ A variation pattern of special PG3-3 is prepared.

  The ROM 54 in the game control microcomputer 560 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 56 to perform various determinations and determinations are stored. In addition, the ROM 54 includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 56 to transmit various control commands from the main board 31 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data etc. are stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes, for example, a special symbol display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. The special symbol display result determination table 130A controls the variable display result to the big hit game state before the stop symbol which becomes the variable display result in the special symbol variable display on the special symbol display 8 is derived and displayed. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not the variable display result is a small hit symbol and whether or not to control the small hit game state based on the random number MR1 for determining the display result of the special symbol. . The special symbol display result determination table 130A is compared with the value of the random number MR1 for determining the display result of the special symbol depending on whether or not the probability variation flag is set (whether it is off or on). The determination value associated with the big hit, the small hit, and the loss is set.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes a jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type determination table 131 sets the decorative symbol variable display mode to “normal” or “first” based on the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types from “1 probability variation” to “third probability variation” and “surprising accuracy”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the value of the random number MR2-1 for jackpot type determination, which are “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, “surprising probability”. The determination value corresponding to the jackpot type of “is set.

  The determination value is a numerical value to be compared with the extracted random number value (random number value). When the random value matches any of the determination values, the determination value corresponds to the determination value (the determination value is assigned). A gaming state or the like is determined. For example, it is determined to execute an effect corresponding to the determination value.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 31 (A) to (F) and FIGS. 32 (A) to (C). The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. In other words, the game state is selected according to whether the game state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short time state, and the determination result of the jackpot type. In each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I, depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability”. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR3 for type determination, which is normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, super CB3-1 to super CB3-5, special CA4-1 A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2 is set.

  As an example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the big hit variation pattern type determination shown in FIG. 31 (A) used when the big hit type is “normal” or “third probability variation”. In the table 132A and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 31B used when the big hit type is “first probability variation”, the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 are used. The judgment value assignment is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation value type of the super CA3-3. The judgment value is not assigned. Further, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4 is not assigned. Judgment value is assigned.

  As described above, when the gaming state is any one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short time state, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132D (in the normal state) selected according to the big hit type in the gaming state. The big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132E to 132H (selected when the probability change state) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C and 132I (selected when the time is short state) are compared. The determination value allocation to each variation pattern type is different depending on. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In particular, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H, and 132I used when the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, When the big hit type such as special CC4-1 or special CC4-2 is other than “surprise”, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the determination value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type becomes “surprise”, when the control is made to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type is different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. be able to.

  As another example, when the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, the big hit variation shown in FIG. 31 (A) used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state. In the pattern type determination table 132A and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. 31E used when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the variation pattern types of the normal CA 3-1 and the super CA 3-2 are used. The judgment value assignment is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3. Is not assigned. As described above, when the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, “first probability change” to “third probability change”, or “surprise probability”, the big hit variation pattern type selected according to the gaming state. Determination tables 132A and 132E (selected when “normal” or “third probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132F (selected when “first probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination table When comparing 132C, 132G (selected when “second probability variation”) and big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H, 132I (selected when “crash probability”), the gaming state is a normal state or a short time state. Depending on whether or not the state is in a probable variation state, the determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type. In addition, determination values may be assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probable variation state, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied. .

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. The small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the variation pattern type is classified into a plurality of types based on the random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination. It is a table that is referenced to determine one of them. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected, for example, according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. That is, the game state is selected according to whether it is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination, and includes special CA4-1, special CB4-1, and special CC4-. The determination value corresponding to one of the fluctuation pattern types is included.

  The variation pattern type of the special CA 4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 33A is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. The variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 33B is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. The variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. 33C is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 31 (D), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. 32 (B), and FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in C) is set so as to include a variation pattern type that is common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  34A to 34C are explanatory diagrams showing reach determination tables 134A to 134C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, and the reach determination random number MR2-2. This table is referred to for determination based on the table. Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. That is, the game state is selected according to whether it is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR2-2 for reach determination, and is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, Non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2 determination results indicating no reach state, reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 The determination value corresponding to one of the determination results to the effect is included.

  For example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 34A, the value in the range of “1” to “204” is set to the non-reach HA 1-1 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “0”. Assigned, a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “1”, a value in the range of “1” to “217” that is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 is non-reach HA 1-2. Assigned to. Furthermore, the value in the range of “1” to “220”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “2”, Allocated to non-reach HA1-3. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, “1” to “1”, which are larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-3. 230 ”is assigned to non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5. With such a setting, when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “3”) or more, it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “reach”. When the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIGS. 35A to 35C are explanatory diagrams showing reach variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> C stored in the ROM 54. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table according to a determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as the use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3 is selected, and the reach use is performed according to the determination result indicating that the reach is the reach HB2-1. The variation pattern type determination table 135B is selected as the use table, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected as the use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach HC2-1 is selected. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a reach determination result indicating whether the reach is a reach HA2-1 to a reach HA2-3, a reach HB2-1, or a reach HC2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the variation pattern of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2 Data (determination value) for determining one of the types is included.

  For example, in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 35A, values (determination values) in the range of “1” to “128” corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-1 are set to normal CA2−. 1 is assigned to the variation pattern type, and other values are assigned to the variation pattern types of Super CA2-2 and Super CA2-3. Further, in accordance with the determination result of reach HA2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. Further, a value in the range of “1” to “182” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA 2-1 in accordance with the determination result of reach HA 2-3. In the reach HA 2-1, the reach judgment table 134 A shown in FIG. 34 (A) is compared with the value of the reach judgment random number MR 2-2 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “0”. A value has been assigned. A determination value is assigned to the reach HA 2-2 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “1” or “2”. The reach HA2-3 is assigned a determination value corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “3” or “4”. With these settings, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed when the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (eg, “1”) compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the “normal” reach effect is shorter than the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the reach effect other than “normal”. If the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  36A to 36C are explanatory diagrams showing non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C include a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is not set to the reach state. It is a table that is referenced to determine one of the types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, and the like. It is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and the non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the non-reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 and non-reach HC1-2, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, which is non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1- 4, data (determination value) corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3 and non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  FIGS. 37, 38A and 38B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C indicate the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, and the variation pattern type is super CB3. -1 to Super CB3-5, the hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result, and the variation pattern type is special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, The hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CB4-2, the special CC4-1, and the special CC4-2 is used. Each of the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit”. Alternatively, data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “small hit” is included.

  FIGS. 39 and 40 are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation patterns 138A and 138B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B indicate variation patterns according to whether or not to reach the reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “out of range”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each deviation variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, in the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type is determined to be one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as a use table according to the result. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is “out of” and variable. This includes data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the display mode is “non-reach”. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is “out of” and variable. It includes data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the display mode is “reach”.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 39, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7 corresponding to the case of non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect. Also, corresponding to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CB1-2, the value in the range of “1” to “100” is assigned to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 that executes the specific effect of “end of the development chance eye”. It has been. With such a setting, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponds to the determination that the decorative symbol variable display result is “out” and the determination that the decorative symbol variable display state is not the reach state. It is possible to make a decision to be one of the variation patterns of reach PA1-7 and to execute an effect operation as a specific effect.

  Then, with respect to the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4, a numerical value (determination) compared with the value of random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination in non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. Value), and a determination value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1, and a determination value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2. Is assigned to the non-reach HA1-3, and “237” to “241” are assigned to the non-reach HA1-4 and the non-reach HA1-5, respectively. "Is assigned. For the non-reach HA 1-1, in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 34A, the value of the random number MR2-2 for reach determination corresponds to the case where the number of reserved storage is “0”. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared and a determination value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned. For the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the reserved storage number corresponds to “1” and is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR2-2 for reach determination, Determination values in the range of “1” to “217” are assigned. For the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number MR2-2 for reach determination, Determination values in the range of “1” to “220” are assigned. For non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, corresponding to the number of reserved storages “3” and “4”, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR2-2 for reach determination In addition, determination values in the range of “1” to “230” are assigned. Accordingly, when the number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the number of reserved memories is “0”. . Further, when the reserved storage number is “3” or “4”, the non-reach CA1-4 is compared with the case where the reserved storage number is “0” or “1” or “2”. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type becomes lower.

  In the variation pattern illustrated in FIG. 27, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. Is 3.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of PA1-5 is 16.70 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-6 in which the specific effect of “Intro” is executed is 10.20 seconds. Yes, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 in which the specific effect of “end of development opportunity end” is executed is 9.25 seconds. That is, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the number of reserved storage is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the number is less than “3”. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 40, the variation pattern for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA2-2, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-4 and the reach effect such as super PA3-5 to super PA3-8. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA2-3 or super CB2-1, the value of random pattern MR4 for variation pattern determination is added to the variation pattern for executing reach effect β1 such as super PB3-1 to super PB3-5. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with is assigned.

  Further, for example, for a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, such as a variation pattern of super PA3-4, super PA3-8, and super PB3-4, a decorative pattern is displayed after the pseudo-continuous variation is performed. The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect executed based on the fact that the variable display state becomes the reach state. That is, since the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-4 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, it corresponds to the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-8 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, it corresponds to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-3 or the super CB 2-1 is used in the outlier variation pattern determination table 138B. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned.

  For the variation pattern types of the normal CA 2-1 and the super CA 2-2, the variation pattern type determination is performed in any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR3 is assigned. Further, the variation pattern type of super CA2-3 is compared with the value of random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination in reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135C shown in FIGS. 35 (A) and 35 (C). A numerical value (judgment value) is assigned. For the variation pattern type of super CB2-1, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination in reach variation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. Assigned. As described above, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 35A to 35C, the effect in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols has reached the reach state. It is configured to be able to determine one of the classified variation pattern types according to the type of operation. Further, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, after the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. It is configured to be able to determine one of the classified variation pattern types depending on the type.

  In the RAM 55 in the game control microcomputer 560, for example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 41 is used as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided. 41 includes a holding storage buffer 151, a game control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155. including.

  The hold storage buffer 151 stores variable display hold data of a special symbol in which a start ball is won by a game ball winning in the start winning ports 13 and 14 but the start condition is not met, but the start condition is not met. As an example, the holding storage buffer 151 stores numerical data indicating the jackpot determination random number MR1 extracted from the counter and numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number MR2-1 in the order of winning to the start winning ports 13 and 14. The data is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 stores a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For each of the plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state are stored. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores a special symbol process flag, a normal symbol process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, and the like.

  The big hit flag is set when it is determined to be a big hit when the special symbol variable display is started, and is reset when the special symbol variable display is completed. The small hit flag is set when it is determined to be a small hit when the special symbol variable display is started, and is reset when the special symbol variable display is completed. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state ends. The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the time reduction state, and is reset when the time reduction state ends.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with counters that realize various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a counter used for controlling the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a counter for generating random numbers, a pending storage number counter, a round number counter, and the like.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a buffer area for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating the big hit type.

  The data indicating the big hit type is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”, and the various types of big hits such as “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, “surprise probability” It is data corresponding to the determination result of which type to determine. For example, based on the determination using the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 30, when the jackpot type is “normal”, “00” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and the jackpot type is “first”. In the case of “probable change”, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and in the case of “second probability change”, “02” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and the jackpot type is “third”. In the case of “probability change”, “03” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and “04” is set as the data indicating the big hit type in the case of the “big hit” type.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 uses a counter to update various random numbers used for controlling the effect operation. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 42, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, and the temporary stop symbols for determining the promotion effect. A random number SR2, a random number SR3 for determining a temporary stop symbol at the time of a slip / development chance, a random number SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining a first to a third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol, a random number SR5 for determining promotion effect execution, The random numbers SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns, the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type, and the random numbers SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns are used. Note that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the effect.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, “in” in the display area of the effect display device 9 as stop symbols that are variable display results of the decorative symbols. This is a random number used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the “right”. The final stop symbols are three decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends. That is.

  The random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol during the promotion effect is normally displayed in a temporary stop display in each of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R for "left", "middle", and "right" when the promotion effect during change is executed. This is a random number used to determine the decorative pattern of the jackpot combination. The random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of slipping / development chance is “left”, “middle”, “ This is a random number used to determine a decorative symbol to be displayed in a temporary stop in all or part of the “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R.

  The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects. This is a random number used to determine a combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the random number SR5 for promotion performance execution determination This is a random number used to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect.

  Random numbers SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns are specific effects corresponding to the contents of the effect operation when executing the specific effects of “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “intro”. It is a random number used to determine a pattern as one of a plurality of types. The random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern when the specific effect of “slip” is executed. The random number SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern when executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. The random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “intro” specific effect.

  The random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is used to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect, and to determine the notice pattern type when executing the notice effect as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. Random number. Random numbers SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns are random numbers used to determine the notice pattern as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of “character display”. The random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of the “step-up image”. The random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of “mail display”.

  The determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100 includes, for example, FIG. 43 as a table for determining a predetermined decorative pattern that is one of the predetermined non-reach combinations and the development chances HC1 to HC8. The final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160D shown in (A) to (D) are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 43A is a left final stop that becomes a finalized symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the finalized symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to in order to determine the symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the symbol number “of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1”. Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 43 (B) is a right final stop that becomes a fixed ornament symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R among the predetermined ornament symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared, and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 43C is a medium final stop that becomes a fixed ornament symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the fixed ornament symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100 includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 44, and includes a left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and a right final stop symbol FZ1-. From the combination with 2, determination is made as to which of the left and right output types DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR127LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR127LR31 to LR38. Including the data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that are the middle final stop symbols FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 43B, the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. No numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is assigned. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol combination is a reach combination or a jackpot combination (except for the chances of success TC1 to TC4). Can be avoided. Further, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 43C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined decorative symbols. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion that is the combination of. For example, even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the portion that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 26A, the portion that becomes the development chance eye HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. In the portion that becomes the odd chance TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 26C, and the portion that is a combination of certain non-reach as shown in FIG. 45, the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value is not assigned. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, an expansion chance item HC1 to HC8, or a random chance item. TC1 to TC4, or a certain non-reach combination similar to these chances can be avoided.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 43 (D) includes symbols “L”, “Middle”, and “R” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, when the specific effect “end of development chance” is executed. The combination of the stop symbols to be the final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6 at 9R is set to one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. It is a table that is referenced to determine. The final stop symbol determination table 160D is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the data (determination value) corresponding to the development chances HC1 to HC8. Including.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, the final table shown in FIG. 46 (A) and FIG. Stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B are included. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 46 (A) has a left final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the finalized symbols that are out of reach. 1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is a confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, are determined based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table to be referenced. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and is the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the same decorative symbols (left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2). The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 46 (B) is a final final stop symbol FZ2- that is a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the fixed decorative symbols that are out of reach combinations. 3 is a table referred to for determining 3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol.

  The middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that constitutes the out-of-reach combination is specified by the symbol difference that is the difference between the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. . That is, in the variable display of decorative symbols, the variation of decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and “left” → “right” → “middle”. When the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the order of “left” and “right” symbols other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the areas 9L and 9R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the "middle" symbol display is performed using the final stop symbol determination table 162B. A difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 stopped and displayed in the area 9C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the determined symbol difference, the final decorative symbol that is the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. If it is one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-1 to PB3-5, Super PC3-1 to Super PC3-4, Special PG2-3, Super PA3- 5 is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to any of the fluctuation patterns of the super PA 3-8, and the symbol difference “− Data (determination values) corresponding to “2”, “−1”, “+1”, “+2” are included.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, as a table for determining a definite decorative symbol to be one of the jackpot combinations or the chances of success TC1 to TC4, for example, FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C shown in (C) are included. The final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 47 (A) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” as fixed ornament symbols that are usually a big hit combination. The left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are tables that are referred to in order to determine the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. The final stop symbol determination table 163A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. -3 includes data (determination values) corresponding to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the same normal symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 47 (B) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” as finalized symbols that are probable big hit combinations. The left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are tables that are referred to in order to determine the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. The final stop symbol determination table 163B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. 3 includes data (determination values) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” of the probability variation symbols that are the same as −3. The final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 47 (C) has a left middle right final stop symbol FZ4-1, FZ4- in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. 2 is a table that is referred to in order to determine the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that become FZ4-3 to be one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol, and the data (determination value) corresponding to the probability chance items TC1 to TC4. Including.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, as shown in FIGS. 48A to 48C, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types. Specific effect pattern determination tables 164A to 164C are included. When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 48A slides the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to slip TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PA4-2, super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Super PF1-3, Special PG1-2, Special In accordance with a variation pattern (see FIGS. 27 and 28) in which a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as a variation pattern of PG2-2 and special PG3-3, the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value and corresponds to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4. Including data (determination value).

  In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the decorative symbols are displayed again in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the decorative symbols are displayed again in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the decorative symbols are displayed again in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the decorative symbols are displayed again in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be performed is performed.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. 48B simulates the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of the series TP2-1 to the pseudo series TP2-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B includes non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PB3-4, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, super A random number SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIGS. 27 and 28) in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect of the change patterns of PF1-1 and special PG1-3 is executed. This is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of, and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to pseudo-continuous TP2-3.

  In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then re-variation (pseudo-variable variation). The all-revariable display operation to be performed is performed once until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2, the all-revariable display operation is performed twice before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the all-revariable display operation is performed three times before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the specific performance pattern is determined to be one of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3 using the specific performance pattern determination table 164B, thereby determining the number of executions of the pseudo-series variation. be able to.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 48C indicates the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern when the “intro” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to intro TP3-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164C includes non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super It is compared with the value of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIGS. 27 and 28) in which the specific effect of “intro” is executed, such as the change pattern of PB5-3. Data (determination value) corresponding to the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3.

  When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, for example, depending on whether the previous effect value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 164 shown in FIG. The assignment of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern to each specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 corresponding to the effect operation is different. The previous effect value is set to 1 when the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined to be intro TP3-1, and is set to 2 when it is determined to be intro TP3-2. Is set to 3. When the previous effect value is 1, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-1. When the previous effect value is 2, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-2, and the previous effect value is 3. In some cases, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific performance pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-3. When the specific effect of “Intro” is executed according to the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6 by such allocation, the same specific effect as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” executed last time It can be prevented from becoming a pattern.

  The determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 49A and the jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 49B. It is included. In the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 49A, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). In this case, the table is referred to for determining whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect based on the promotion effect execution determination random number SR5. The fluctuating promotion effect execution determination table 165A is compared with the value of the random number SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. Data (determination value) corresponding to a determination result indicating the presence / absence of a promotion effect during change. When the big hit type is “normal” or “third probability variation”, all the numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the value of the promotion effect execution determination random number SR5 are assigned to the determination results with the changing promotion effect. As a result, the promotion failure production during the change is executed. When the big hit type is “first probability variation”, the determination value corresponding to a part of the random effect SR5 for determining the promotion effect is assigned to the determination result with the changing promotion effect, and the remaining determination values are set. It is assigned to the determination result without promotion effect during fluctuation. In this case, if the determination result indicates that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion success effect is executed. Further, when the jackpot type is “second probability variation”, all the numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the value of the random effect SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution are allotted to the determination result without the promotion effect during the change, and the change Neither the middle promotion success production nor the variable promotion promotion production is executed.

  In the big hit middle promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 49B, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). Is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect based on the promotion effect execution determination random number SR5. The jackpot promotion promotion execution determination table 165B is compared with the value of the random effect SR5 for promotion effect execution determination depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. Data (determination value) corresponding to a determination result indicating the presence / absence of a jackpot promotion promotion success effect or a jackpot promotion promotion failure effect. When the jackpot type is “normal”, all the numerical values (judgment values) compared with the value of the randomization SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution are allotted to the determination result of the jackpot medium promotion failure effect, and the jackpot medium promotion failure The production will be executed. When the jackpot type is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, all the numerical values (determination values) compared with the value of the random effect SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution are all determined to be that there is no promotion effect during the jackpot. Assigned to the result. Accordingly, neither the jackpot promotion promotion success effect nor the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is “third probability variation”, the determination value corresponding to a part of the random effect SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result with the jackpot promotion success effect, and the remaining determination values Is assigned to the determination result that there is a promotion promotion failure during the big hit. In this case, depending on the determination result, either the jackpot promotion promotion success effect or the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, FIG. 50 (A) is used as a table for determining the decorative symbols to be displayed temporarily stopped when the specific effect of “slip” is executed. ) To (D), temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are included. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D is used according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 according to the table selection rule as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are temporarily stopped at the time of slipping / development chances according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the symbol display area where the decorative symbols are changed again. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for symbol determination, and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped symbols. In other words, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A has a decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. According to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance, and the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1 The data (judgment value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B has a symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In accordance with “1” to “8”, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance, and the ornament that becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2 Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of symbols are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C has the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random stop SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development opportunity according to “1” to “8”, and the ornament that becomes the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3 Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of symbols are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D has a symbol number of a decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. A decoration (judgment value) that is compared with the value of the random stop SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance according to “1” to “8”, and becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4 Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of symbols are included.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, FIG. 51 is used as a table for determining the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D shown in (A) to (D) are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D indicate that when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4- 4. Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-3 Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of re-variable display operations to be executed until the operation is performed. For example, the remaining number of re-variable display operations is “0” in the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo continuous variation) in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop symbol is stopped one time before that. The displayed decorative pattern variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is “1”, and the decorative symbol variation (pseudo-continuous variation) in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed two times before becomes “2”. What happens after the quasi-continuous variation in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped is executed so that the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo-variable variation) in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “3”? This corresponds to whether the pseudo continuous variation (variation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shows the total re-variation display operation executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the right to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as the symbol, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C are selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. When the remaining number of re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of the special PG1 to 3, is “1”. The left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R, In the “medium” symbol display area 9 </ b> C, it is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ <b> 2-3 to be the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-8, Super PA 4-4, Super PA 4-8, Super PB 3-4, Super PB 4-4, Super PB 5-4, Super PF1. -1 or special PG1-3, the remaining number of re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “2” The left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the right temporary stop symbol KZ3-, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R. 2. Selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3, which is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the "medium" symbol display area 9C. . The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. If the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the stop symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “3”, the symbol display “left” is displayed. Left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the area 9L, right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and “middle” symbol display. In the area 9C, it is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ4-3 which is the intermediate symbol to be displayed for temporary stop. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-5, the specific effect pattern is determined to be the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the total re-variation display operation to be re-variable after the temporary stop display is performed only once, it is not necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table. When the variation pattern is the special PG1-3, the specific effect pattern is determined to be the pseudo continuous TP2-1 or the pseudo continuous TP2-2 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B illustrated in FIG. Since the total re-variation display operation for re-variation after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed is performed at most twice, it is not necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determining table 167D as the use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 51A and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 51B are left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” symbol display area 9L. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbol, It includes data (determination values) corresponding to pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by combinations of stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 51C is determined by using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol 2-3. Is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 It includes data (determination values) corresponding to pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by a combination of the middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2, and KZ3-3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 51D includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, a right temporary stop symbol 3-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. Is a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol, depending on which of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1-GC8 It includes data (determination values) corresponding to pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8 configured by a combination of the middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3.

  By determining the temporary stop symbols using the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, the pseudo continuous variation due to each specific effect pattern of the pseudo continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo continuous TP2-3. Depending on the number of executions, any of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 can be used as a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Can be determined.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, as a table for determining a decorative design that is temporarily stopped and displayed when a specific development of “Development Chance” is executed, for example, FIG. A temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. The temporary stop symbol determination table 168 indicates the chance of slipping / development according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that are the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” symbol display area 9L. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol, which is a development chance eye HC1 configured by a combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3 -Data (determination value) corresponding to HC8 is included.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, a temporary table shown in FIG. 54 is used as a table for determining a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed when the changing promotion effect is executed. A stop symbol determination table 169 is included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 169 has the same left, middle, and right final symbols that are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” as definitive decorative symbols that are jackpot combinations. A numerical value (compared with the value of the random number SR2 for temporary stop symbol determination for promotion effect according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3. Corresponding to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” of the normal symbols which are the same as the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, KZ7-3. Data (determination value) to be included.

  The determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes a notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. The notice pattern type determination table 170 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of kinds of notice pattern types based on the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type. In the notice pattern type determination table 170, when the variation pattern is any one of non-reach PA1-1, non-reach PA1-2, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PC1-1, or non-reach PA1-3. , Non-reach PA1-4, non-reach PA1-6, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-2, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5 -3, super PB3-3, super PB4-3, and super PB5-3, depending on the variation pattern other than these variation patterns, A numerical value (determination value) to be compared, and there is no notice or data corresponding to the notice pattern type of notice CY1 to notice CY3 (judgment) ) Including the.

  In the notice pattern type determination table 170, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB4-4. 3. Corresponding to the case of a variation pattern (see FIGS. 27 and 28) in which a specific effect of “intro” of the super PB 5-3 is executed, the determination value corresponding to the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is All are assigned without notice. Therefore, when the specific effect of “intro” is executed, execution of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is limited. In the specific effect of “Intro”, the display of effects in the specific effect is started within a short time after the decorative symbols start to change in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right”. Is started and a notice effect is performed, the execution period overlaps. Therefore, in the advance notice pattern type determination table 170, a numerical value (compared with the value of the random number SR7 for the advance notice pattern type determination so that there is no advance notice in the case of a variation pattern in which a specific effect of “Intro” is executed) ( By assigning (determination value), it is possible to prevent the notice effect having the execution period overlapped with the specific effect of “Intro” from being executed.

  The determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100 includes, for example, the notification pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIGS. 56 to 58 as tables for determining any of the plurality of types of notification patterns. include. When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY1, the notice pattern judgment table 171A indicates that there is no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP1-1 to notice YP1 based on the first notice pattern determination random number SR8-1. -4 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first notice pattern determination random number SR8-1 according to the variation pattern, and has no notice or notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-1. Data (determination value) corresponding to the notice pattern of YP1-4 is included.

  In the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4, the effect display in the notice effect of “character display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “character display” notice effect, a character image corresponding to each notice pattern of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY2, the notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 57 indicates that there is no notice or a notice pattern based on the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern. 1 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the notices YP2-4. The advance notice pattern determination table 171B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR8-2 for determining the second advance notice pattern according to the variation pattern, and has no notice or notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-1. Data (determination value) corresponding to the notice pattern of YP2 is included.

  In the notice patterns of the notice YP2-1 to the notice YP2-4, the effect display in the notice effect of the “step-up image” is performed in different effect display modes. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, and then each notice pattern of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4 is displayed. Correspondingly, a plurality of types of effect images may be switched and displayed according to a predetermined order, or the effect images may not be switched.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY3, the notice pattern determination table 171C indicates that there is no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP3-1 to notice YP3 based on the third notice pattern determination random number SR8-3. -3 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the third notice pattern determination random number SR8-3 according to the variation pattern, and has no notice or notice YP3-1 to notice. Data (determination value) corresponding to the notice pattern of YP3-3 is included.

  In the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 to the notice YP3-3, the effect display in the notice effect of “mail display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “mail display” notice effect, an effect image that prompts the user to operate the operation button 30 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, and then the notice YP3-1 to the notice is given in response to the operation button 30 being operated. If the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern of YP3-3 is displayed and the operation button 30 is not operated, the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern is not displayed. As described above, in the “mail display” notice effect, the effect operation changes in response to the operation button 30 being operated.

  In the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 58, values in the range of “1” to “170” are associated with the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 in which the specific effect is executed. Assigned without notice. Corresponding to the variation pattern in which the decorative display variable display state becomes the reach state, a smaller number of determination values than the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 are assigned without notice. ing. For example, values in the range of “1” to “160” are assigned without notice corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4. For other variation patterns that reach reach, assigning a judgment value for determining the third notice pattern depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” and the type of reach (normal or super) Is different. Further, in response to the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PB1-1, and non-reach PC1-1 where the specific effect is not executed, non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1- A larger number of judgment values than the seven variation patterns are assigned without notice. In other words, values in the range of “1” to “190” are assigned without notice. With such a setting, the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, compared with the variation pattern in which the decorative display variable display state is a reach state. The ratio of executing the effect is reduced, and the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than that when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is not executed. In addition, when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is executed, the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the variation pattern does not execute the specific effect. The ratio of executing the notice effect with high reliability (possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”) is high, and the reliability is higher than when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern that reaches a reach state. The ratio of executing a high notice effect becomes low.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 59A, a notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 60 includes various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 59 (A), the display area of the effect display device 9 in the period from when the variation of the ornament symbol starts until when the final symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations such as the variable display operation of the decorative design, the effect display operation in the reach effect, and the effect display operation in the specific effect as the pattern variation control pattern. Each design variation control pattern is, for example, a variety of display designs such as production control process timer setting values, production control process timer determination values, production display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and end codes. The control data for controlling the rendering operation is included, and the contents of various rendering controls, the switching timing of the rendering control, and the like are set in time series.

  The notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 59 (B) shows the control contents of the effect operation corresponding to the notice effect, such as the effect display operation in the notice effect, corresponding to each of the plurality of types of the notice pattern. A plurality of types of data may be stored as the notice effect control pattern. Each notice effect control pattern is, for example, control for controlling various effect operations according to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. The contents of various effect controls, the timing of switching the effect controls, and the like are set in a time series including data.

  The notice effect control pattern table 181 stores notice effect control patterns of notice CYP1-1 to notice CYP1-4 corresponding to the notice patterns of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-1 is an effect control pattern for displaying the character image MC101 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2 is an effect control pattern for displaying the character image MC101 and the character image MC102 in correspondence with the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-3 is an effect control pattern in which the character image MC101 and the character image MC103 are displayed corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-3. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-4 is an effect control pattern for displaying the character images MC101 to MC103 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-4.

  The notice effect control pattern table 181 stores notice effect control patterns of notice CYP2-1 to notice CYP2-4 corresponding to the notice patterns of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4. The notice control pattern of the notice CYP2-1 is an effect control pattern that displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1 and ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. It is. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-2 displays the effect image of the second step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-2, and the effect control pattern that ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. It is. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-3 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-3, and after switching the effect image to the effect image of the second step, the notice effect This is an effect control pattern for ending. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-4 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-4, switches the effect image to the effect image of the second step, and further the third step. This is an effect control pattern for terminating the notice effect after switching to the effect image.

  Further, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-1-1 and the notice CYP3-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1, and the notice of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-2-1 and the notice CYP3-2-2 are stored corresponding to the pattern, and the notice CYP3-3-1 and the notice CYP3-3-3 are corresponded to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. Two notice effect control patterns are stored. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-1 is an effect control pattern for displaying the effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-2 is an effect control pattern for displaying the effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 is an effect control pattern that displays an effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-2 is an effect control pattern that displays an effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-1 is an effect control pattern for displaying the effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-2 is an effect control pattern that displays an effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3.

  In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 60, a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state are stored as the effect control patterns. . Each effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect operation in a big hit game state or a small hit game state such as an effect control process timer set value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The contents of various production controls according to the progress of the production, switching timing of production control, and the like are set in time series.

  In the RAM 100 for effect control, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 61 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 61 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 31, etc. Are stored.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a counter that realizes a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 9. . The effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. In the effect control counter setting unit 193, data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters is stored.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations.

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. In this embodiment, the effect control command is converted from parallel data to serial data by the serial output circuit 78 and transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the format of the effect control command transmitted as the serial data method. As shown in FIG. 62, when transmitting the effect control command, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first adds header data and mark bits to MODE data (MODE data to which an address is added), Transmission control is performed by adding an end bit. Then, the serial output circuit 78 converts the MODE data to which the header data, the address, the mark bit, and the end bit are added into serial data, and transmits the serial data to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs transmission control by adding header data, mark bits, and end bits to EXT data (EXT data with an address added). Then, the serial output circuit 78 converts the EXT data to which the header data, the address, the mark bit, and the end bit are added into serial data, and transmits the serial data to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As a method for sending the production control command, production control command data is output from the main board 31 to the production control board 80 via the relay board 77 using the eight parallel signal lines of the production control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave-like) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data may be used. In that case, the 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 63, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern) that specifies a variation pattern of an effect symbol (decoration symbol) that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of a special symbol. Command) (corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect symbols (decorative symbols).

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of the big hit game. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the decorative design and the production design in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H). It is called a command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are for displaying a fanfare screen, that is, an effect control command for designating the start of a jackpot game or the start of a jackpot game (a jackpot start designation command or a jackpot start designation command: a fanfare designation command). is there. The big hit start designation command or the small hit start designation command includes a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start designation 2 designation command, and a small hit / rush start designation command corresponding to the type or small hit. The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game, and also specifies an effect control command (special jackpot end 1 designation command: ending) that specifies that the game is a non-probable big hit (usually a big hit) 1 designation command). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command). is there. Command A303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / probability end designation command: ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change game.

  Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (abnormal winning notification designation command) for instructing abnormal winning notification.

  The command FF02 (H) notifies that a full tank error has occurred when the lower plate (surplus ball receiving plate) 4 is full (that is, when the full tank switch is turned on). This is an effect control command to be designated (full error notification designation command). The command FF01 (H) is an effect control that designates that notification of a full tank error is canceled when the full tank state of the lower plate 4 is released (that is, when the full tank switch is turned off). Command (full tank error release specification command).

  The command FF04 (H) designates that when the game frame 11 is in an open state (that is, when a detection signal from the door open sensor 157 is detected), notification that a door open error has occurred is specified. This is a command (door opening error notification designation command). The command FF03 (H) is an effect control command (door opening error release specifying command) that specifies that the notification of the door opening error is released when the open state of the game frame 11 is released.

  Command FF06 (H) is an effect control command (out of ball) that specifies that a ball out error has occurred when the ball is out of state (that is, when the ball out switch is turned on). Error notification designation command). The command FF05 (H) is an effect control command (ball-out error cancel designation command) that designates cancellation of the ball-out error notification when the ball-out state is released.

  The command FF08 (H) is an effect control command (prize ball error notification designation command) for designating notification that a prize ball error has occurred when a prize ball error has occurred. The command FF07 (H) is an effect control command (prize ball error cancel designation command) that designates canceling the notification of the prize ball error when the prize ball error is canceled.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed in accordance with the contents shown in FIG.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transmission timing of the effect control command. As shown in FIG. 64, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a change pattern command and a display result specifying command at the start of change. When the variable display time has elapsed, a symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted.

  Before transmitting the variation pattern command, a background designation command for designating a background image in the effect display device 9 according to the gaming state (for example, normal state / short time state / probability variation state) may be transmitted.

  FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S27) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a start port switch passing process (step S311). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is ready to start the variable display of the special symbol, it checks the number of reserved memories (the number of start winning memories). The reserved memory number can be confirmed by the count value of the reserved memory number counter. If the number of reserved memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to step S301.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The stop symbol after the variable display of the special symbol is determined. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result specifying command transmission process (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped. Update to a value corresponding to S304 (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the special symbol display 8 is stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. When the big hit flag is set and the small hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Further, a process for setting a flag (for example, a probability variation flag) indicating a gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). It should be noted that although the pre-opening process for small hits is executed for each round, the pre-opening process for small hits is also a process for starting a small hit game when starting the first round.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S311. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first start port switch 13a is turned on (step S211). If not, the process proceeds to step S215. If the first start port switch 13a is turned on, it is confirmed whether or not the reserved storage number is 4 which is the upper limit value (step S212). If the number of reserved memories is 4, the process is terminated.

  If the reserved memory number is not 4, the value of the reserved memory number counter indicating the reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (step S213). Further, the CPU 56 extracts software random numbers (such as a counter value for generating a jackpot symbol determination random number) and stores them in the reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the reserved memory number counter as the extracted random number value. A process of storing in the area is executed (step S214). Then, the process proceeds to step S215. In the reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the reserved storage number are secured. Further, a counter for generating a jackpot symbol determination random number and the like and a reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  In step S214, the CPU 56 extracts random 1 (MR1) and random 2-1 (MR2-2) (see FIG. 25) as software random numbers, but random 2-2 (MR2-2), random 3 (MR3) and random 4 (MR4) may also be extracted.

  In step S215, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on. If not, the process ends. If the second start port switch 14a is on, it is confirmed whether or not the number of reserved memories is 4 which is the upper limit value (step S216). If the number of reserved memories is 4, the process is terminated.

  If the number of reserved memories is not 4, the value of the reserved memory number counter indicating the number of reserved memories is incremented by 1 (step S217). Further, the CPU 56 extracts software random numbers (such as a counter value for generating a jackpot symbol determination random number) and stores them in the reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the reserved memory number counter as the extracted random number value. Processing to store in the area is executed (step S218).

  68 and 69 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 checks the value of the number of reserved storage (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of reserved memories is 0, the process is terminated. If the reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 reads the data of the area of the reserved number 1 in the reserved memory buffer 151 (the area where the oldest data is stored), and stores the read data in the random number buffer area ( Step S52). Further, the value of the reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of the reserved memory buffer 151 are shifted (step S53). That is, the data stored in the storage area corresponding to the hold number n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the hold storage buffer 151 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the hold number (n−1).

  Then, the CPU 56 selects the special symbol display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 29 as a table used for determining the variable display result (stop symbol) (step S54). “Selecting a table” means, for example, setting the start address of a table (in this example, the special symbol display result determination table 130A) to the determination table pointer formed in the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the random number MR1 (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area matches any of the jackpot determination values (step S65). If they match, the process proceeds to step S72. If they do not match, it is checked whether the value of MR1 matches any of the small hit determination values (step S66). If they match, a small hit flag is set (step S76). Then, control goes to a step S77.

  If they do not coincide with each other, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state when the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S67). , S68). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0, a time reduction end flag is set in order to shift the gaming state to the non-time reduction state when the variable display is ended (steps S69 and S70). Then, control goes to a step S77.

  In step S72, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag and selects the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 30 as a table used to determine the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S73). Then, the types (“normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”) corresponding to the value of the jackpot type determination random number MR2-1 stored in the random number buffer area. Alternatively, “big hit” is determined as the big hit type (step S74). Further, the data (“00” to “04”) indicating the determined jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S75).

  In step S77, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol. Specifically, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be “normal”, “3”, which is a normal jackpot symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. Further, when the big hit type is determined from “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, “7” which is the probability variation big hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. Further, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise”, “1” which is the two round big hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S78).

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91).

  When the big hit flag is set, the big hit variation pattern type determination is performed according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. 32D as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. One of the tables 132A to 132I is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S101. The CPU 56 can determine the gaming state based on the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  When the small hit flag is set, the small hit variation pattern is used as a table used for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected (steps S93 and S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the table selection rule shown in FIG. 34 (D) is based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state. Accordingly, one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected as a table used for determining whether or not the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state (step S95). Further, MR2-2 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 2-2 (MR2-2) (step S96). Then, the CPU 56 determines whether or not there is a reach state corresponding to a value that matches the value of MR2-2 in the area corresponding to the reserved storage number (the value of the reserved storage number counter) in any of the selected reach determination tables 134A to 134C. Whether or not to reach, and the type of effect when not reaching or the type of reach when reaching is determined (step S97).

  If it is decided to reach, the variation pattern type is determined according to the reach type (reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1 or reach HC2-1) determined in the process of step S97. One of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types (step S99). If it is decided not to reach, the types of effects determined in the process of step S97 (non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1- 1 or non-reach HC1-2), one of non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. (Step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  In step S101, the CPU 56 extracts the value of MR3 by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 3 (MR3). Then, based on the extracted value of MR3, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the table selected in the process of step S92, S94, S99 or S100 (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C as the tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. One of the determination tables 138A and 138B is selected (step S103). Further, the value of MR4 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 4 (MR4) (step S104). Based on the extracted value of MR4, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103 (step S105).

  Next, control is performed to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (step S107). For example, a start flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302). In the display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit any effect control command (refer to FIG. 63) of display result 1 designation to display result 7 designation according to the type of jackpot that has been lost or determined. Do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S111). If it is not set, and if the small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a display result 7 designation command (steps S113 and S114). If the small hit flag is not set, control for transmitting a display result 1 designation command is performed (step S115). When the big hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit any effect control command from the display result 2 designation to the display result 6 designation (step S112). Which effect control command is to be transmitted is determined based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S117).

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 decrements the variable time timer by 1 (step S121), and when the variable time timer times out (step S122), the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (step S304). The updated value is updated (step S123). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 to end the variation of the special symbol, and performs control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol on the special symbol display unit 8. (Step S131). Moreover, control which transmits the symbol determination designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for production control is performed (step S132). If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S141 (step S133).

  If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag (step S134), and performs control to send a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S135). Specifically, when it is determined to be a probability variation big hit, a big hit start 2 designation command is transmitted, and when it is decided to suddenly a probability variation big hit, a small hit start / sudden probability variation designation command is transmitted. If not, a big hit start 1 designation command is sent. It should be noted that the small hitting start / sudden probability change designation command is used for both small hitting and sudden hitting. Further, whether or not it is determined to be a promising big hit is determined based on data indicating the big hit type stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155.

  Also, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S136). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of a normal big hit and a probable big hit (15 round big hit) and 2 times in the case of a sudden hit (2 round big hit)) is set in the big prize opening number counter (step). S137). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S138).

  In step S141, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set. If the small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit / probability start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). The small hitting start / sudden probability change designation command is used for both small hitting and sudden hitting. Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the big hit / small hit display time timer (step S143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the short-time end flag is set (step S146). When the time reduction end flag is set, the time reduction end flag is reset and the time reduction flag is reset (steps S147 and S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S149).

  In the big winning opening opening pre-processing, when the big hit display time timer is set, the CPU 56 controls to open the big winning opening when the big hit display time timer times out, and sets the big winning opening opening time timer. Set a value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 29 seconds for normal big hit and probability big hit, 0.5 seconds for small hit and sudden hit), and set the special symbol process flag value to open the big prize opening The value is updated to a value corresponding to the intermediate process (step S306). The case where the big hit display time timer is set is the case before the start of the first round. When the interval timer (timer for determining the interval time between rounds) is set, when the interval timer times out, control is performed to open the big prize opening and the opening time ( For example, a value corresponding to 29 seconds is usually set for a big hit and a probable big hit, and 0.5 seconds is set for a small hit and a sudden hit.) Update to a value corresponding to step S306).

  In the process for opening the big prize opening, when the big prize opening time timer times out or the number of winning balls to the big prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the CPU 56 sets the value of the number-of-opening counter. -1. If the final round has not ended, control is performed to close the special winning opening, and a value corresponding to the interval time is set in the interval timer, and the value of the special symbol process flag is processed before the special winning opening is processed. Update to a value corresponding to (step S305). When the final round is completed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S307).

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S151). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S161. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the time reduction flag is set to shift the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S152), and 100 is set in the time reduction counter (step S153).

  Further, the big hit flag is reset (step S154), and a control for transmitting a big hit end designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S155). If it is a probable big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is sent. If it is suddenly a probable big hit, a small hit / collision end designation command is sent. If it is a normal big hit, a big hit end 1 is sent. Send the specified command. It should be noted that the small hit / surprise end designation command is used for both the small hit and the sudden hit. If the big hit type is “probability change” or “probability” (step S156), a probability change flag is set to shift the gaming state to the probability change state (step S157). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S158), and the processing is ended.

  In step S161, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S162). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S163).

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S310) in the special symbol process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step S171). If the small hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S175. If the small hitting end display timer is not set, the small hitting flag is reset (step S172), and a control for transmitting a small hitting / coincidence end designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S173). It should be noted that the small hit / surprise end designation command is used for both the small hit and the sudden hit. Further, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (small hit end display time) during which the small hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 is set in the small hit end display timer (step S174), and the process is performed. finish.

  In step S175, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step S176). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S177).

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the abnormal winning notification process in step S23. In the abnormal winning notification process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the abnormal notification prohibition flag is set (step S581). The abnormality notification prohibition flag is set in the main process executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started (see step S44 in FIG. 23). When the abnormality notification prohibition flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S585. If the abnormality notification prohibition flag is set, the value of the prohibition period timer set in step S45 is decremented by 1 (step S582). When the value of the prohibition period timer becomes 0, that is, when the prohibition period timer times out, the abnormality notification prohibition flag is reset (steps S583 and S584).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S585). The state where the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more is a state where a big hit game or a small hit game is being played. In such a state, there is a possibility that a game ball will win the big winning opening, so it is not confirmed that an abnormal winning has occurred in the big winning opening. That is, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more, the abnormal winning notification process is terminated.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (a state where neither a big hit game nor a small hit game is played), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on (step S586). When the count switch 23 is turned on, it is determined that an abnormal winning at the special winning opening has occurred, and control is performed to transmit an abnormal winning notification designation command to the effect control board 80 (step S587).

  When the count switch 23 is turned on in a state where neither a big hit game nor a small hit game is performed by the above processing, an abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted. In addition, the process of steps S581 to S583 prohibits the start of abnormality notification when the effect control microcomputer 100 is performing initialization notification. The production control microcomputer 100 continues to execute the initialization notification until the period corresponding to the prohibition period has elapsed since the start of the initialization notification.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described.
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). .

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and executes a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed. In addition, a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol) is executed (step S706). Moreover, the notification control process process which performs notification using an effect device such as the effect display device 9 is executed (step S707). Furthermore, the serial input / output process which outputs the data set by the command analysis process, the effect control process process, and the notification control process process to the serial output circuit 353, and reads the data received from the input ICs 620 and 621 from the serial input circuit 354. Is executed (step S708). Further, when the rotating bodies 84 and 85 are rotating, a process for stopping the rotation of the rotating bodies 84 and 85 is executed in response to the establishment of a predetermined stop condition (rotating body stopping process: step S709). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 63) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  79 to 81 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 stores the display result specifying command in a display result specifying command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618). .

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is one of the jackpot start 1-2 specification commands (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets the jackpot start 1 specification command reception flag or the jackpot start 2 specification command reception flag (step S623). S624). If the received effect control command is a small hit / accuracy start designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / accuracy start designation command reception flag (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632A). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols. Also, an initial notification flag is set (step S632B), and a RAM clear flag is set (step S632C).

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and an initial notification flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command or a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S642). If the received effect control command is a small hit / abrupt end specification command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / abrupt end specification command reception flag (step S644).

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal prize notification designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormal prize notification designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received production control command is a full tank error release designation command (step S649), the production control CPU 101 resets the full tank error notification flag set in step S652 described later and sets an error notification release flag ( Step S650).

  If the received production control command is a full tank error notification designation command (step S651), the production control CPU 101 sets a full tank error notification flag (step S652).

  If the received effect control command is a door opening error release designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 resets the door opening error notification flag set in step S656 to be described later, and sets the error notification cancellation flag. (Step S654).

  If the received effect control command is a door opening error notification designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 sets a door opening error notification flag (step S656).

  If the received effect control command is a ball break error release designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 resets the ball break error notification flag set in step S660, which will be described later, and sets the error notification cancel flag. (Step S658).

  If the received effect control command is a ball-out error notification designation command (step S659), the effect control CPU 101 sets a ball-out error notification flag (step S660).

  If the received effect control command is a prize ball error release designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 resets the prize ball error notification flag set in step S664 described later and sets the error notification release flag. (Step S662).

  If the received effect control command is a prize ball error notification designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 sets a prize ball error notification flag (step S664).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S665). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S806 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) is realized.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) Control to derive and display. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805).

  Big hit game processing (step S805): Control during big hit game is performed. For example, when a special winning opening opening designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S806).

  Big hit end processing (step S806): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  84 and 85 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be off (step S501). Whether it is determined to be out of place is determined by, for example, whether or not a display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined to be off, it is confirmed whether a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received as the fluctuation pattern command (step S502). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 101 uses the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command as a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development chance”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S503). For example, if the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern of non-reach PA1-7 (see FIG. 27), it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development opportunity”. .

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development chance eye”, the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbols constituting any of the development chance points HC1 to HC8 ( Step S504). In the process of step S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 43D is selected as the use table. Further, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, FZ1 that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8. The combination of −6 is determined as the stop symbol for the decorative symbol.

  If it is determined in the process of step S503 that the variation pattern does not execute the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol that does not reach reach (step S505). In the process of step S505, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 43A is selected as the use table. Next, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 43B is selected as a use table. Subsequently, the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-2, the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. Further, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 shown in FIG. 44 based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the left / right output type DC1-1 is Determine which of the multiple types. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 43C is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-3 and the left and right outcome type DC1-1, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C.

  In the process of step S505, by referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the decorative symbols to be used as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. The stop symbol of the symbol does not become a reach combination or a jackpot combination. Further, even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 26 (A), the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 26 (B), FIG. There is no combination of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in (C) and a certain non-reach as shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbols constituting the reach combination (step S506). In the process of step S506, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 46A is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the same decorative design as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 46B is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the extracted random number SR1-3, the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 become the decorative symbols and the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3. The design difference from the decorative design is determined. The effect control CPU 101 determines a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 according to the determined symbol difference.

  As described above, in the process of step S506, the CPU 101 for effect control first uses the final stop symbol determination table 162A to “left” other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed last. ”And“ Right ”symbol display areas 9L and 9R, and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 are displayed. Next, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2-1 in the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. , FZ2-2 is determined as a design difference with respect to the decorative symbol, and according to the determined symbol difference, a decorative symbol as the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  If it is not determined to be out of place (step S501), the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not it has been determined to be sudden or small hit (step S507). Whether or not it has been determined to be a surprise or small hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 6 designation command or a display result 7 designation command (see FIG. 63) is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined that the accuracy or small hit is determined, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is one of the variation patterns of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-4 (step S508). . As shown in FIG. 28, the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 are all variation patterns in which the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is one of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4, the process proceeds to step S503, and the effect control CPU 101 performs step S504 or step S505. Then, the decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is determined.

  If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is any of the special PG 1-1 to special PG 1-4, the effect control CPU 101 is designated by the variation pattern designation command in the process of step S503. If the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the special PG1-4 (see FIG. 28), it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development chance”.

  If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is other than the special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 variation pattern, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the designated variation pattern is a special PG2-1 to special PG2-3. It is determined whether or not any of the variation patterns (step S509). As shown in FIG. 28, the variation patterns of special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 are all variation patterns in which a “normal” reach effect is performed after the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach state. . Therefore, if the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the variation pattern is one of the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-3 in the process of step S509, the final combination constituting the reach combination is performed in the process of step S506. A decorative design that is a stop design is determined.

  If it is determined in step S509 that the variation pattern is other than the special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 variation pattern), the designated variation pattern is one of the special PG3-1 to special PG3-3 variation patterns. Become. As shown in FIG. 28, the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3 are variation patterns such that the display result of the decorative symbol is any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4. Therefore, when any of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3 is designated, the effect control CPU 101 displays the final stop symbol of the decorative symbols constituting any of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4. Determine (step S510). In the process of step S510, the effect control CPU 101 selects the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 47C as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4 that become any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4. -3 is determined as the final stop symbol.

  When it is not determined that the winning probability or the small hit (step S507), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the big hit type is “normal big hit” or “third positive variation” (step S511). When the big hit type is “normal big hit” or “third probability variation”, the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination is determined (step S512). In the process of step S512, the effect control CPU 101 selects the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 47A as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are usually one of the big hit combinations are displayed. The combination is determined as the final stop symbol.

  When the big hit type is neither “normal” nor “third probability variation” (step S511), the effect control CPU 101 changes the probability according to whether the big hit type is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”. The final stop symbol of the big winning combination decorative symbol is determined (step S513). In the process of step S513, the CPU 101 for effect control selects the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 47B as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3, which become one of the combinations of probability variation big hits by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B. Is determined as the final stop symbol.

  After executing any one of steps S504, S505, and S506, or after executing any one of steps S510, S512, and S513, the effect control CPU 101 executes a specific effect setting process (step S514). ). Further, the changing promotion effect setting process is executed (step S515). Further, a notice effect setting process is executed (step S516).

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the specific effect setting process. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that does not include the specific effect (step S551). If the variation pattern does not include the specific effect, the specific effect setting process ends.

  If the variation pattern includes a specific effect, it is determined whether the specific effect is any one of “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “intro” (step S552). If it is one of the specific effects of “sliding”, “pseudo train”, and “intro”, the effect control CPU 101 selects a specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect as a use table (step S553). When the specific effect of “slip” is selected, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 48A is selected. When the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is selected, FIG. The specified specific effect pattern determination table 164B is selected, and when the specific effect is “intro”, the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 48C is selected.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the specific effect pattern as one of a plurality of types (step S554). In the case of the “slip” specific effect, the value of the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted. Based on the value of the extracted random number SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A selected in the process of step S552. To do. In the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the value of the random number SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR6-2, the specific effect pattern is selected from any one of the pseudo-series TP2-1 to the pseudo-series TP2-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164B selected in the process of step S552. To decide. In the case of the “Intro” specific effect, the value of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is extracted. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is read. And when the fluctuation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, based on the value of the extracted random number SR6-3 and the previous effect value, when the fluctuation pattern is other than non-reach PA 1-6, it is extracted. Based on the value of the random number SR6-3, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of the intro TP3-1 to the intro TP3-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164C.

  When the specific effect is “intro” (step S555), the effect control CPU 101 determines the specific effect pattern according to the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 determined in the process of step S554. The previous effect value is updated with the previous effect buffer update setting value in the table 164C (step S556). For example, when the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 is determined in the process of step S554, the previous effect value is updated to 1. When the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-2 is determined in the process of step S554, the previous effect value is updated to 2. When the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-3 is determined in the process of step S554, the previous effect value is updated to 3.

  By executing the processing of step S556, any of the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 prepared for each type of effect operation corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “intro”. Each time it is determined, the previous effect value corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the determined intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 is updated. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined as one of a plurality of types, the determined type of effect operation is stored as an update value last time. In the process of step S554, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect value is read and the determination using the specific effect pattern determination table 164C as shown in FIG. 48C is performed. Thus, the specific effect pattern can be determined so that the same type of effect operation as the effect operation type stored as the previous effect value is not executed.

  If it is determined in step S552 that the specific effect is other than “slip”, “pseudo-run”, or “intro”, if it is determined in step S555 that the specific effect is other than “intro”, and step When the process of S556 is executed, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the specific effect is any one of “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “expansion chance” (step S557). If it is a specific effect other than “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, and “expansion chance”, the specific effect setting process is terminated. If it is one of the specific effects of “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, and “expansion chance”, the effect control CPU 101 determines a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the specific effect (step S558).

  In the process of step S558, the effect control CPU 101 follows the table selection rule shown in FIG. 50E based on the specific effect pattern determined in the process of step S554 when the specific effect of “slip” is determined. Any one of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development opportunity is extracted. The right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, and the right temporary stop symbol are referred to by referring to any of the selected temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the value of the extracted random number SR3. 1-3, a decorative symbol to be one of the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 is determined.

  In the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation to a constant M based on the specific effect pattern determined in the process of step S554. For example, the constant M is set to “1” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, and the constant M is set to “2” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2. In the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the constant M is set to “3”. In addition, “0” is set to the variable N indicating the determined number of combinations of temporary stop symbols. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 51A is selected as the use table, and the variation pattern is super PA3-4, super PA3-8. , Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-3, The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted. Based on the value of the extracted random number SR4-1, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is referred to by referring to either the selected temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B. A combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. Then, it is updated by adding 1 to the variable N, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the process of step S558 ends. If the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. Moreover, the value of the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C based on the value of the extracted random number SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3- that become any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. 2. Determine the combination of KZ3-3. Then, it is updated by adding 1 to the variable N, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the process of step S558 ends. If the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. Further, the value of the random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D based on the value of the extracted random number SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-, which become any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. 2. Determine the combination of KZ4-3.

  In the case of a specific effect of “Development Chance”, the effect control CPU 101 selects the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 53 as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development opportunity is extracted. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 based on the value of the extracted random number SR3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6 that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8. -3 combination is determined.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the changing promotion effect setting process (step S515). In the changing promotion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot type is determined to be a jackpot other than “surprise” (step S571). If the jackpot is not determined, and if the jackpot type is “surprising” but determined to be a jackpot, the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated.

  When the big hit type is determined to be a big hit other than “surprise”, the CPU 101 for effect control selects the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. S572). Further, the value of the random number SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is extracted (step S573). Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR5, by referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A selected in the process of step S572, the big hit types are “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. The presence / absence of the changing promotion effect is determined (step S574). If it is determined that there is no changing promotion effect, the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined that there is a changing promotion effect, a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the changing promotion effect is determined (step S576). In the process of step S576, the CPU 101 for effect control selects the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 54 as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of promotion effect is extracted. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 based on the value of the extracted random number SR2, the decorative symbols determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are displayed. The combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, KZ7-3 is determined according to the number.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect setting process (step S516). In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 selects the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 55 as a use table (step S591). Further, the value of the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is extracted (step S592). Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR7, by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 170, the notice pattern type is determined as either no notice or notice pattern CY1 to notice CY3 according to the variation pattern ( Step S593). If it is determined without notice, the notice effect setting process is terminated.

  When it is determined to be one of the notice pattern types of the notice CY1 to the notice CY3, the effect control CPU 101 determines the notice pattern determination table 171A shown in FIG. 56 according to the decided notice pattern type and FIG. One of the indicated notice pattern determination table 171B and the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 58 is selected as a use table (step S595). When the notice pattern type of the notice CY1 is determined in step S593, the notice pattern determination table 171A is selected. When the notice pattern type of the notice CY2 is decided, the notice pattern determination table 171B is selected, and the notice is determined. When the notice pattern type CY3 is determined, the notice pattern determination table 171C is selected. Then, the notice pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S596).

  In the process of step S596, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern when the notice pattern type is determined to be the notice CY1. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR8-1, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 171A selected in the process of step S595, any of the notice patterns of no notice or notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4 is selected. Decide on.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be the notice CY2, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR8-2, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 171B selected in the process of step S595, there is no notice or any of the notice patterns of the notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4. Decide on.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be the notice CY3, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the third notice pattern random number SR8-3. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR8-3, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 171C selected in the process of step S595, any of the notice patterns of no notice or notice YP3-1 to notice YP3-3 is selected. Decide on.

  After executing the processing of steps S514 to S516, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect control pattern to be one of a plurality of types (step S517). The CPU 101 for effect control, for example, according to the presence / absence of the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command, the specific effect pattern determined by the process of step S554, and the promotion effect during change determined by the process of step S574. One of a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 59 (A) is selected as a usage pattern. Further, any one of a plurality of types of notice effect control patterns stored in the notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 59B is used corresponding to the notice pattern determined in the process of step S596. Select as a pattern.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern (step S518). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S519).

  FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and rotating body control data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. In the rotator control data, data indicating the speed (including stop) of the rotators 84 and 85 is described. In addition, when the speed is not changed, data that can specify that there is no change is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The lamp control execution data in the process table also includes data for controlling (turning on or off) the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, and 85d. The production control CPU 101 uses the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c based on the data indicating that the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d are lit in the lamp control execution data. , 85d are turned on, and the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c are based on the data indicating that the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d are turned off in the lamp control execution data. , 85d are turned off.

  The process table shown in FIG. 89 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each production control pattern. Note that the process table is a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 59A, a notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 59B, and various effect control pattern tables shown in FIG. 182 corresponds to a more specific example. In this embodiment, a process table for error notification (error notification process table) used when various types of error notification are performed is prepared separately from the process table used for normal game effects shown in FIG. ing.

  FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of lamp control content executed in accordance with process data (including error notification process data) when each production control command is received. As shown in FIG. 90, the effect control CPU 101 receives, for example, a jackpot end 1 designation command, and when the gaming state is set to the normal state, the LED 125a to 125f of the center decoration lamp on the gaming board 6 and the stage Control is performed so that only the LEDs 126a to 126f of the lamp are lit. Then, while the gaming state is the normal state, an effect is made such that only the LED 125a to 125f of the center decoration lamp and the LEDs 126a to 126f of the stage lamp on the gaming board 6 are lit.

  In addition, for example, when the game control CPU 101 receives a jackpot end 2 designation command and changes the gaming state to a probable change state, the center decoration lamp LEDs 125 a to 125 f and the stage lamp LEDs 126 a to 126 f on the gaming board 6. In addition to the lighting, the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of each lamp (excluding the dish lamp) on the game frame 11 side are controlled to blink at a predetermined time interval (for example, 1 second). While the gaming state is in the probable state, in addition to the lighting of the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamps LEDs 126a to 126f on the gaming board 6, each lamp on the gaming frame 11 side (excluding the dish lamp) The LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f are flashed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 1 second).

  Further, for example, when the big hit start designation command is received and the big hit is made, the effect control CPU 101 blinks the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamps LEDs 126a to 126f on the game board 6, An effect is made such that the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of each lamp (excluding the dish lamp) on the game frame 11 side are blinked at a time interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) faster than the probability variation state. By performing such an effect, compared to when the gaming state is in the probable state, by flashing more lamps at a faster time interval than in the probable state, compared to when in the promising state when the big hit occurs Can produce a more flashy impression.

  Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control receives an initialization designation command and performs initialization notification and RAM clear notification, the LEDs 281a to 281l of the respective lamps (excluding the dish lamp) on the game frame 11 side. , 282a to 282f and 283a to 283f are performed. In addition, for example, when the effect control CPU 101 receives an abnormal winning notification designation command and performs abnormal winning notification, the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f of the respective lamps (excluding the dish lamp) on the game frame 11 side are provided. An effect of blinking 283a to 283f is performed. In addition, for example, the production control CPU 101 receives a full tank error notification designation command and performs an effect of blinking the pan lamps 82a to 82d when performing full tank error notification. For example, when the CPU 101 for effect control receives a door opening error designation command and issues a door opening error notification, the LEDs 281a to 281l and 282a to 282f of the respective lamps (excluding the dish lamp) on the game frame 11 side. , 283a to 283f are flashed. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 receives an out-of-ball error designation command and performs an effect of blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l of the top frame lamps on the game frame 11 side when notifying the out-of-ball error. In addition, for example, when the effect control CPU 101 receives a prize ball error designation command and issues a prize ball error notification, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect of blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l of the top frame lamps on the game frame 11 side.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 indicates an abnormal notification flag indicating that an abnormal winning notification is being made, and other error flags (a RAM clear flag, a full tank error notification flag, a door opening error notification flag, a ball shortage error notification flag, On condition that the award ball error notification flag) is not set, the effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect part, and the effect use device) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, sound number data 1) Control of the speaker 27) as a component is executed (steps S520 and S521). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice synthesizing IC 173 in order to perform voice output from the speaker 27.

  Further, when data indicating that the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d are turned on is added to the lamp control execution data, the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b. , 85c and 85d are controlled. When data indicating that the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d are turned off is added to the lamp control execution data, the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b are added. , 85c and 85d are controlled to turn off. In this embodiment, the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, and 85d have signals indicating whether they are turned on or off by serial signals, as in other lamps and LEDs. 84c, 84d and LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d. However, a signal line is directly wired from the output port of the production control microcomputer 100, and signals indicating lighting or extinguishing are directly supplied to the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d. You may be comprised so that. Further, as described above, the faster the rotational speed of the rotating bodies 84, 85, the shorter the blinking cycle of the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d. This is realized by increasing or decreasing each process timer value in the process table.

  The effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control various lamps as effect components in accordance with the lamp control execution data 1 (step S522). For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the effect control CPU 101 supplies lamp control signals for lighting only the center decoration lamps LEDs 125a to 125f and the stage lamp LEDs 126a to 126f to a predetermined data storage area. set. When the gaming state is a probable change state, the LED 125a to 125f of the center decoration lamp and the LEDs 126a to 126f of the stage lamp are turned on, and all the lamps provided on the gaming frame 11 side (excluding the dish lamp) Lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f are set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S835C is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  When the abnormality notification flag or other error flag is set, the control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data 1 excluding the sound number data 1 and the lamp control execution data 1 (steps S520 and S523). That is, when the abnormality notification flag or other error flag is set, when a new variable display of a decorative design is started, a sound effect corresponding to the variable display and a display effect by a lamp are executed. Instead of abnormal winnings and various error notifications (RAM clear notification, full tank error notification, door opening error notification, ball runout error notification, prize ball error notification), sound output and lamp display effects are continued. .

  In addition, when performing the process of step S523, the CPU 101 for effect control does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data 1 to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. That is, the display at that time on the effect display device 9 (notification of abnormal winning or full error) and the image of the display effect of variable display of decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed on the effect display device 9. To control. That is, when the abnormality notification flag and other error flags are set, when a new variable display of a decorative design is started, only the display effect according to the variable display is not executed. Notifications according to abnormal winning notifications and various error notifications are also continued.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S524), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802). (Step S525).

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S842). When the process timer times out (step S843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S844).

  In addition, on the condition that the abnormality notification flag and other error flags (RAM clear flag, full tank error notification flag, door open error notification flag, out of ball error notification flag, prize ball error notification flag) are not set Next, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the set display control execution data and sound number data (steps S845A and S845B).

  In step S845B, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a command to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9, for example. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice synthesizing IC 173 in order to perform voice output from the speaker 27.

  When data indicating “stop” is set in the rotating body control data, the effect control CPU 101 sets a rotating body stop request flag (steps S845C and S845D). The rotating body stop request flag is referred to in the rotating body stop process in step S709.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing in order to control various lamps as effect components in accordance with the lamp control execution data (step S845E). For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the effect control CPU 101 supplies lamp control signals for lighting only the center decoration lamps LEDs 125a to 125f and the stage lamp LEDs 126a to 126f to a predetermined data storage area. set. When the gaming state is a probable change state, the LED 125a to 125f of the center decoration lamp and the LEDs 126a to 126f of the stage lamp are turned on, and all the lamps provided on the gaming frame 11 side (excluding the dish lamp) Lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f are set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in the process of step S845E is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay board 606. , 607 to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  When the abnormality notification flag or other error flag is set, the process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (except for the sound number data i and the lamp control execution data i). Control of the rendering device is executed (steps S845A and S845F). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag or other error flag is set, a sound effect according to the variable display of the decorative design and a display effect by the lamp are not executed, but an abnormal winning notification and various error notifications are performed. Sound output and lamp display effects according to (RAM clear notification, full tank error notification, door opening error notification, ball runout error notification, prize ball error notification) are continued.

  In addition, when the process of step S845F is performed, the effect control CPU 101 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data i to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. . Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag and other error flags are set, not only the display effect according to the variable display of the decorative design is executed, but the notification according to the abnormal winning notification or various error notifications is performed. Will continue.

  When data indicating that the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d are turned on or off is added to the lamp control execution data, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the LEDs 84a, 84b are turned on. , 84c, 84d and LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d are controlled to be turned on or off.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S846), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S848). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S847), the process proceeds to step S848. Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop variation.For example, a variation pattern command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates is received. Even in such a case, the variation of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol has ended).

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the confirmed command reception flag is set (step S851). If the confirmed command reception flag is set, the confirmed command reception flag is reset. (Step S852), and control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol is performed (Step S853). Then, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a big hit (step S854). Whether or not it is determined to be a big hit is confirmed by, for example, a display result specifying command stored in the display result specifying command storage area. In this embodiment, it can be confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a big hit based on the determined stop symbol.

  When it is determined to be a big hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S855).

  If it is determined not to win, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the time reduction state flag is set (step S856). The short time state flag is set when the gaming state is a short time state (see step S886 described later). If the time reduction state flag is set, the value of the time reduction variation counter is incremented by 1 (step S857).

  Then, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the time-varying variation number counter is 100 (step S858). If the value of the hour / short fluctuation counter is 100, the hour / short state flag is reset (step S859). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S860).

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variation (variable display) of the decorative symbols on the condition that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received (see steps S851 and S853). However, if the variation time timer based on the received variation pattern command times out, the variation of the decorative symbol may be controlled to end without receiving the symbol determination designation command. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 may not transmit the symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of variable display.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display processing, the effect control CPU 101 has received a flag indicating that one of the big hit start 1 designation command, the big hit start 2 designation command, or the small hit / surprise start designation command (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag, big hit) It is confirmed whether or not the start 2 designation command reception flag and the small hit / surprise start designation command reception flag are set (step S871). If any one of the flags is set, control is performed to display a game start screen corresponding to the set flag on the effect display device 9 (step S872). In addition, the set flag (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag, big hit start 2 designation command reception flag, or small hit / coincidence start designation command reception flag) is reset (step S873). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805) (step S874).

  In step S872, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display on the effect display device 9 a screen for informing the start of the big hit game when the big hit start 1 designation command or the big hit start 2 designation command is received. Do. In addition, when the small hit / rush probability start designation command is received, a control for displaying on the effect display device 9 a screen for notifying the start of the sudden probability change big hit game (also used as a screen for notifying the start of the small hit game). I do.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the big hit game processing. In the big hit game process, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a big hit end designation command (big hit end 1 designation command and big hit end 2 designation command) or a small hit / surprise end designation command has been received (step S861). When the big hit end designation command or the small hit / surprise end designation command has been received, the big hit middle effect or the small hit middle effect performed corresponding to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is terminated (step S862). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S806). In the process of step S862, for example, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a predetermined command signal to the VDP 109, outputs data indicating a predetermined sound effect signal to the audio output board 70, The control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35, and the effect operation of the big hit effect is ended.

  When the big hit end designation command and the small hit / surprise end designation command are not received, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the promotion effect in-progress flag is set (step S864). The promotion effect in-progress flag is set in the process of step S872, and is reset in the process of step S876. Note that the promotion effect flag is also reset when the process of step S862 is executed.

  When the promotion effect flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the value of the variation time timer matches the predetermined effect start determination value, thereby determining the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect. It is determined whether or not (step S865). The execution period of each round is short in the 2-round big hit state, but the production start determination value is a value set in the variable time timer (fluctuating so that the execution timing of the promotion effect during the big hit is not reached in the 2-round big hit state. A value longer than the value according to time).

  When it is determined that it is the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects the jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 49B as the use table (step S866). Further, the value of the random number SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is extracted (step S867). Based on the value of the extracted random number SR5, by referring to the jackpot promotion promotion execution determination table 165B, whether the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. Accordingly, the presence / absence of the promotion effect during the big hit is determined. If it is determined to perform the jackpot promotion promotion effect, a determination is made regarding execution of the jackpot promotion effect to determine whether to execute the jackpot promotion promotion effect or the jackpot promotion promotion effect (step S868). .

  When it is determined that it is not the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect, or when it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect in the process of step S868, the effect control CPU 101 determines the number of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state. The effect operation of the big hit effect according to a certain number of rounds is executed (step S870). In the process of step S870, the effect control CPU 101 specifies the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state from the special winning opening open designation command received from the main board 31 or the like. When the number of rounds is updated, the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated number of rounds is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 60, and the process timer is set. After that, in accordance with the process data read from the effect control pattern according to the process timer value, the effect operation during the big hit by the effect device is executed.

  In the process of step S870, when the setting corresponding to the reception of the special winning opening opening designation command is received from the main board 31, the variation pattern in the variable display of the decorative symbol executed immediately before the big hit gaming state is set. You may make it perform the setting for performing different production | presentation operation | movement according to the variation pattern classification classified. For example, when the big hit type of the variation pattern types of special CA4-1, special CB4-1, and special CC4-1 is “surprise” and when the variable display result is “small hit”, the common variation pattern type When the decorative symbols are variably displayed according to the variation patterns to be classified and then controlled to the two round big hit state, the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-2 and hit control CRE1-2 shown in FIG. The effect control patterns to be sequentially used are selected and read out, and the effect operation is set according to the effect control patterns. The decorative symbols are variably displayed by the variation patterns classified into the variation pattern types used only when the big hit type of the variation pattern types of the special CA4-2, special CB4-2, and special CC4-2 is “surprise”. When the game is controlled to the big hit game state after two rounds, the effect control patterns of the hit start CST2-1 and the hit control CRE1-1 shown in FIG. The production operation is set according to the production control pattern.

  When it is determined in step S868 to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the effect control CPU 101 performs setting for starting the jackpot promotion effect (step S871). In the processing of step S871, the effect control CPU 101 specifies the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state from the special winning opening open designation command received from the main board 31 or the like. Then, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion effect corresponding to the specified number of rounds is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. It should be noted that the value of the notification content buffer (notification content buffer value) provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example, is determined depending on which of the big hit middle promotion success production and the big hit middle promotion failure production is executed. You may make it set. As a specific example, the notification content buffer value is set to “1” when the big success promotion effect is executed, and the notification content buffer value is set to “0” when the big success promotion effect is executed. To do. Thereafter, the promotion effect flag is set to the on state (step S872).

  If it is determined in the process of step S864 that the promotion effect flag is on, for example, the effect control CPU 101 matches the timer value of the variable time timer and the effect end determination value indicated by the effect control pattern. Depending on whether or not, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S873). If it is not the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect, a bonus action for the jackpot promotion effect is executed (step S874). In the process of step S874, the CPU 101 for effect control executes the effect operation of the promotion effect during the big hit by the effect device according to the process data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value.

  When it is determined in step S873 that it is the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect, the effect control CPU 101 ends the jackpot promotion effect (step S875) and resets the promotion effect flag (step S876). .

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the big hit end processing. At the end of the big hit, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending effect flag is set (step S881). The ending production in-progress flag is set in the process of step S888 and reset in the process of step S891.

  When the ending effect flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the big hit type is “normal” or not, based on the display result specifying command received from the main board 31 or the like ( Step S882). If it is not a normal big hit, it is determined whether or not the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S883). When the big hit type is “third probability variation”, for example, it is determined from the notification content buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 whether or not the promotion success effect has been executed (step S884). For example, when the notification content buffer value is “1”, it is determined that the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed, and when the notification content buffer value is “0”, the jackpot promotion promotion effect is not executed. Is determined.

  When it is determined that the jackpot type is other than “third probability variation”, or when it is determined in step S884 that the promotion success effect has been executed, the effect control CPU 101 performs a predetermined non-promotion ending effect. Settings for starting the production operation are performed (step S885). In the process of step S885, the CPU 101 for effect control determines whether the 15 round round big hit state or the 2 round big hit state ends by the display result specifying command received from the main board 31 or the like. Then, according to the determination result of the jackpot gaming state to be finished, the effect control pattern that does not execute the promotion effect is read from the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 60, and the process timer is set.

  When it is determined in the process of step S884 that the promotion success effect has not been executed, the effect control CPU 101 performs setting for starting the effect operation of the ending promotion success effect (step S886). In the process of step S886, the effect control CPU 101 reads the effect control pattern for executing the promotion success effect from the various effect control pattern tables 182 in response to the end of the 15th round big hit state, and sets the process timer and the like. Do.

  If it is determined in step S882 that the game is a normal big hit, the effect control CPU 101 performs setting for starting the effect operation of the ending promotion failure effect (step S887). In the process of step S887, the production control CPU 101 reads out the production control pattern for executing the promotion failure production from the various production control pattern table 182 in response to the end of the 15th round big hit state, and sets the process timer and the like. Do.

  When any of the processes of steps S885 to S887 is executed, the effect control CPU 101 sets an ending effect flag (step S888).

  If it is determined in step S881 that the ending effect flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 matches, for example, the timer value of the variable time timer and the effect end determination value indicated by the effect control pattern. It is determined whether or not the end timing of the ending effect has come (step S889). The ending effect is an effect operation executed in response to the end of the big hit gaming state including the non-promotion ending effect, the ending promotion success effect, and the ending promotion failure effect.

  If it is determined in step S889 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect, the effect control CPU 101 executes the effect operation of the ending effect (step S890). In the process of step S890, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect operation of the ending effect by controlling the effect device according to the control data read from the effect control pattern in accordance with the timer value of the process timer. If it is determined in step S889 that it is the end timing of the ending effect, the effect control CPU 101 resets the ending effect flag and ends the ending effect (step S891). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation start command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S892).

  Next, a specific example of the effect operation in the display area of the effect display device 9 will be described. In the effect control board 80, for example, the effect control CPU 101 sends a predetermined command signal to the VDP 109 in the process of step S 521 in FIG. 84 based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command received from the main board 31. By outputting, the variation of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R provided in the display area of the effect display device 9.

  First, a specific example in the case where the variable display result of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “out of” will be described. FIG. 96 shows that, when the decorative display variable display mode is “non-reach”, when the specific effect is not executed, when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the “slip” specific effect is executed. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example when a specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” is executed. When the non-reach PA1-1 variation pattern is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effects as shown in FIGS. 96 (C1) and (C2) are not executed. When the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 is designated, a “slip” specific effect as shown in FIGS. 96 (E1) to (E4) is executed. When the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-5 is designated, a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect as shown in FIGS. 96 (D1) to (D6) is executed. When the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 is designated, the specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” as shown in FIGS. 96 (F1) to (F6) is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 96A, for example, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. In all, the decoration pattern starts to change. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96B, the decorative symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, the left final stop symbol is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 43A in step S505 in FIG. Corresponding to the determination of the decorative symbol “6” as FZ1-1, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), if the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, the specific design is performed. The effect pattern is always determined to be the slip TP1-1, and the “slip” specific effect that causes the decorative symbol to re-variate at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R is executed. Therefore, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L is not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. Further, when the specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” is executed, the development chance eye HC6 is configured by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 43D in step S504 in FIG. In response to the combination of the decorative symbols to be determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 96 (B) is performed. . When the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the decorative symbol “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 in the process of step S505 in FIG. 84, and the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is displayed. Based on the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 51 (A) in step S558 in FIG. Corresponding to the determination as KZ2-2 and KZ2-3, a decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 96 (B) is performed.

  Thereafter, when the specific effect is not executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 96 (C1), the decorative symbol “7” is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. As shown in 96 (C2), after the decorative symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display). Is done. At this time, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R and the “middle” symbol display area 9C refer to the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 43B in step S505 in FIG. In addition, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 43C together with the left / right outcome determination table 161 shown in FIG. 44, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are determined. Is done.

  When a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 96 (D1), the decorative symbol “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (D2), the decorative symbol “6” is stopped and displayed in the “middle” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), so that the decorative symbol that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is stopped. Is displayed. At this time, for example, a temporary stop display such as a decorative fluctuation display is performed, and then the decorative symbols are changed again in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as shown in FIG. 96 (D3). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 96 (D4) to (D6), the decorative symbols “6”, “7”, and “4” are sequentially applied in a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. After the stop display (temporary stop display), the decorative symbols that are non-reach combinations are stopped (final stop display).

  When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 96 (E1), the decorative symbol “5” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. As shown in FIG. 96 (E2), the decorative symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (E3), the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the decorative symbol “7” is displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Here, as shown in FIG. 96 (E1), the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R is based on, for example, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 determined in step S505 in FIG. In step S596 in FIG. 88, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A shown in FIG. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 96 (E4), after the decorative symbol “4” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, the decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped. Displayed (final stop display).

  When the specific effect “end of development chance” is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 96 (F1), the decorative symbol “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (F2), the decorative symbol “7” is also stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” symbol display area 9C. As a result, the decorative symbols constituting the development chance eye HC6 are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 96 (F3), an effect display is performed such that the temporarily stopped decorative design rotates in a certain direction, and then, as shown in FIG. 96 (F4), a decorative design is performed. The effect display is performed so that the player can expect the development that the variable display state becomes the reach state. Here, if the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped from the effect display as shown in FIG. 96 (F4) is rotated in the reverse direction, the development to reach the reach state occurs. In this example, an effect display is performed so that the decorative pattern displayed in the temporarily stopped state returns to the original state as shown in FIG. 96 (F5), for example, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the decorative symbols constituting the development chance eye HC6 are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display operation example in a case where a specific effect of “intro” is executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, a specific effect of “Intro” as shown in FIG. 97 is executed. In FIG. 97 (A), for example, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are decorated in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol variable display. The design changes. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the decorative symbol “3” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and “2” is displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. "" Is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and the character image CH1 is displayed at a display position corresponding to the "medium" symbol display area 9C. The character image CH1 may be a reach effect that is executed when the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state later, and may appear as an effect image.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), after the effect display is performed to update the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, As shown in FIG. 4D, in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, “4” in the “left” symbol display area 9L is updated to the decorative symbol “4”, and “3” in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Each updated display on the decorative design is performed. Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (E), after the effect display that further updates the decorative symbols updated and displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R is performed. As shown in FIG. 97 (F), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” symbol display area 9L, an update display to the decorative symbol “2” is performed, and in the “right” symbol display area 9R, “1” is displayed. "Is updated and displayed on the decorative symbols. Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (G), an effect display that updates the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R in accordance with the change of the character image CH1. As shown in 80 (H) to (K), “2” decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and “right” symbol display areas 9R are “ The decorative symbols “1” to “3” are updated and displayed in a predetermined order. Thereafter, in the “right” symbol display area 9R, for example, an effect display that updates the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 97 (L) is performed, and then “3” as shown in FIG. 97 (M). Is temporarily stopped. When the specific effect of “intro” is completed in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, the decorative symbols that are non-reach combinations are stopped and displayed (final stop display). .

  FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example when the specific effect of “intro” is executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. Any of the variation patterns of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, Super PB3-3, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3 by the variation pattern designation command When is specified, a specific effect of “intro” as shown in FIG. 98 is executed. In the display operation example shown in FIG. 98, the same effect display as that shown in FIGS. 97 (A) to (L) is performed in the portions of FIGS. 98 (A) to (L). Thereafter, in the “right” symbol display area 9R, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (M), the “2” decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the “left” symbol display area 9L is temporarily stopped. The variable display state becomes the reach state together with the decorative pattern that is displayed. When the specific effect of “Intro” is finished, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, a reach effect corresponding to the change of the variable display state to the reach state is started. After that, decorative symbols that are combinations of reach, decorative symbols that are combinations of jackpots, etc. are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  99 to 101 are explanatory diagrams illustrating display operation examples when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”. In the example shown in FIG. 99 (A), for example, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” correspond to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display. In all, the decoration pattern starts to change. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99B, the decorative symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  For example, when the specific effect of “slip” is executed as in the case where the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, as shown in FIGS. 99 (C1) to (C3), “Left” and After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the decorative symbols are changed again in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed again. The effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed so as to reach the reach state. Further, for example, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed as in the case where the variation pattern is Super PA4-4, as shown in FIGS. 99 (D1) to (D5), all symbols are displayed. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, an effect display is performed in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo continuous variation) in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Thereafter, the decorative symbols of “6” are aligned and stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, and the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state. Further, for example, when the specific effect of “Development Chance” is executed as in the case where the variation pattern is Super PC 4-1, as shown in FIGS. 99 (E1) to (E6), In the symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R, after the combination of the decorative symbols that will become the development chance HC6 is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), the effect display that rotates the decorative symbol that is displayed temporarily stopped in the reverse direction Is performed, the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state.

  In the reach state as shown in FIG. 99 (C3) and FIG. 99 (D5), as shown in FIG. 100 (A), the variation speed of the decorative symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C decreases. . When the variation pattern is any one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the number “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is “ A “normal” reach effect that is stopped (temporarily stopped) together with the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (B), the decorative symbols constituting the combination of jackpots are stopped and displayed corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result is “out of”. In such a case, for example, as shown in FIG. 100 (H), after displaying the effect image indicating that the number indicating “5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 9C having “medium”, “medium” is displayed. Reach out of combination by stopping display of decorative symbols other than the number indicating “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, such as stopping displaying the decorative symbol of the number “5” in the symbol display area 9C of FIG. It is only necessary to stop and display the decorative symbols constituting the, and end the variable display of the decorative symbols. When any one of the reach effect α1 to the reach effect α3 or the reach effect β1 to the reach effect β3 is executed, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), the decoration in the “medium” symbol display area 9C has been lowered. The symbol fluctuation speed rises again, and various reach effects are displayed. In the reach effect β1, after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 100D is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds. Further, in the case of any one of the reach effects α1 to the reach effects α3, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 100 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 100 (F) proceeds. To do. Then, in the reach effect α1, as shown in FIG. 100 (G), a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (G), the decorative symbols constituting the combination of jackpots are stopped and displayed in response to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result is “out of place”. In this case, it is only necessary to stop and display the decorative symbols that make up the unreachable combination and end the variable display of decorative symbols. On the other hand, in reach effect α2 and reach effect α3, as shown in FIGS. 100 (H) and (I), the process proceeds to the second stage effect display. In the reach effect β2 and the reach effect β3, after the character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 100J is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  When the second stage effect display proceeds as shown in FIG. 100 (I), if it is reach effect α2, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the second stage effect display is stopped (temporary stop display). A decorative pattern appears. If the variable display result is “displaced”, the displayed decorative symbols are not changed as shown in FIG. 101 (B), and the decorative symbols constituting the reach-off combination are stopped and displayed. The variable display of symbols is terminated. In the reach effect α3, as shown in FIGS. 101B to 101D, the process proceeds to the third stage effect display (also referred to as “relief effect”). Then, a decorative pattern that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage of effect display appears. For example, if it is determined in step S574 in FIG. 87 that the changing promotion effect is not to be executed, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is used as the final stopped decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 101 (E). Stop display (final stop display). In addition, when it is decided to execute the changing promotion effect, the decorative symbol that is a combination of the normal jackpot is temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 101 (G) as shown in FIG. 101 (F). As described above, the symbols are changed again in a state where the same decorative symbols are arranged in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Then, when the promotion effect during change is executed in response to the big hit type being “first probability change”, for example, as shown in FIG. After the change, the promotion success effect during change is performed to stop and display the decorative symbol that becomes a combination of the probable big hit. In addition, when the promotion promotion effect during change is executed, after performing the change again of the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 101 (G), for example, as in FIG. What is necessary is just to stop-display the decorative pattern which becomes.

  FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example when a notice display effect of “mail display” is executed. In this display operation example, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol variable display, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the symbol display areas 9L for “left”, “middle”, and “right” The decorative symbols stopped and displayed at 9C and 9R start to change in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the effect display control data read from the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 decided in step S517 in FIG. 84 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2 decided in step S596 in FIG. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 102C, an effect image YH1 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is displayed. When the player operates the operation button 30 within a predetermined period, and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 to the effect control board 80 is turned on accordingly, the effect control CPU 101 By switching the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 to the notice CYP3-2-2, the effect image YH2 indicating the mail message as shown in FIG. Change the behavior. If the operation button 30 is not operated within the predetermined period, the notice effect control pattern is not switched, the effect image YH1 is erased as shown in FIG. 102 (E), and the notice effect ends. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 102 (F), the decorative symbol variable display proceeds such as temporarily stopping display of the decorative symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (A), all of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” correspond to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display. The decoration pattern starts to change. Thereafter, as shown in 86 (B) to (D), the decorative symbols “1”, “5”, and “3” are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of “left” → “right” → “middle” ( After the temporary stop display), the decorative symbol that becomes the chance of chance TC1 is stopped and displayed (final stop display). At this time, as a big hit effect in the two round big hit state, as shown in FIG. 103 (E), an effect image for notifying the transition to a special effect mode such as the LIVE mode is displayed. Then, as the ending effect in response to the end of the two round big hit state, an effect image as shown in FIG. 103 (F) is displayed, and the display enabling recognition of the LIVE mode is shown in FIG. 103 (G As shown in (), the display is kept displayed even after the next decorative pattern change is started.

  In this embodiment, for example, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot determination random number MR1 matches the jackpot determination value before the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or decoration pattern is derived and displayed. (See step S65 in FIG. 69), it is determined whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. In the process of step S97 in FIG. 70, based on the fact that the big hit flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state. Then, in the process of step S102, the decorative pattern variation pattern type is selected from among a plurality of types based on the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state, and the like. Decide on. In the process of step S105, the decorative pattern variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result in step S102. The effect control interval 100 includes, for example, an effect symbol variation start process in step S801 in FIG. 82 and an effect symbol variation process in step S802 in accordance with a variation pattern designation command or a display result specifying command received from the main board 31. By executing the control, in response to the determination result of the process in step S105, control for executing various rendering operations during variable display of the decorative design is performed.

  In response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S97 in FIG. 70, step S105 is performed using one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C selected in step S99. By executing the process, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2 according to the reach state. To do. Further, in response to the determination that the reach state is not set in the process of step S97, the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C selected in the process of step S110 are used. By executing the processing, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2 that execute a specific effect during variable display of decorative symbols.

  Further, in response to the determination that the CPU 56 reaches the reach state in the process of step S97 in FIG. 70, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is used based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S103. By executing the process of step S105, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to “reach”. Further, it is determined in step S97 in FIG. 70 that the reach state is not set, and in step S102, the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type for executing the specific effect is determined. Correspondingly, a plurality of types of non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7 prepared in advance for executing a specific effect by executing the process of step S105 using the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Therefore, even if the decorative display variable display state does not reach the reach state, specific effects such as “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, “intro”, and “end of development opportunity” can be executed, enabling various effects. This can improve the game entertainment. Further, in the processes in step S102 and step S105, the variation pattern type and the variation pattern are determined using a different determination table depending on whether or not the reach state is determined in the process in step S97. The determination process does not conflict between the case where the state is set and the case where the reach state is not set. Therefore, the value of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type used for determining the variation pattern type can be made common numerical data regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state. The value of the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern used for determining the pattern can be set to common numerical data regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state. Therefore, the amount of processing in the processing executed to update the values of the random number MR3 and the random number MR4 (for example, the display random number value updating processing in step S26 in FIG. 24) is reduced, and the amount of programs is reduced. Can do. Further, in the processes in steps S102 and S103, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by the common processing module regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S97. In the processes of steps S104 and S105, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by the common processing module regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S97. Therefore, the amount of programs can be reduced as compared with the case where the determination is performed using different processing modules according to the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach state.

  Further, in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. 36A, the non-reach CA1- executes a specific effect when the number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number compared to when it is less than the predetermined number. The table data is configured so that the ratio determined for the variation pattern type 4 is low. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory buffer 151 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, it is possible to reduce the average fluctuation time of special symbols and decorative symbols and reduce the winnings that the start condition is not satisfied.

  In addition, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 35A to 35C, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the classified variation pattern types depending on the type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in the reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation different from the design, and various production operations can be executed at a predetermined rate close to the design. Can be improved.

  In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 31 (A) to (F) and FIGS. The table data is configured so that different variation pattern types can be determined according to the above. Therefore, it is possible to perform different types of performance operations according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 31A to 31F and FIGS. Accordingly, different variation pattern types can be determined. Therefore, different types of effect operations can be executed according to the gaming state, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  As described above, after determining the variation pattern type using the value of the common random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the determination result. If so, various presentation operations can be executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state.

  If the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the variation pattern is to execute the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in the processing of steps S551 and S552 in FIG. 86, the specific effect pattern is set to the pseudo-reaction TP2- in step S554. In accordance with the change control pattern (effect control pattern) determined in step S517 in FIG. 84 according to the determination of any of 1 to quasi-continuous TP2-3, the temporary stop symbol determined in step S558, and the like. Execute the process. That is, based on the fact that the special symbol variable display start condition is satisfied once, all the decorative symbols are changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Specifying the “pseudo-continuous” in which the effect display is performed a predetermined number of times in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Production can be performed. Then, in response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S97 in FIG. 70, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A set in step S99 for use in the determination in step S102. ˜135C, the variation pattern type classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state after executing the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. The table data is configured so that it can be determined either. In this way, it varies depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the reach state instead of the type of effect operation in the specific effect such as whether or not to execute the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. By determining the variation pattern type using the determination table that classifies the pattern type, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in the reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation different from the design. It is possible to improve amusement entertainment by executing a large production operation at a predetermined rate close to the design.

  Further, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, control is made to the 15 rounds big hit state. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, control is made to the two round big hit state. Then, based on the fact that the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” in the process of step S74 in FIG. 69, the big hit variation pattern type selected in the process of step S92 for use in the determination in step S102 in FIG. In the determination tables 132D, 132H, and 132I, for example, the big hit type such as the special CA4-1, the special CA4-2, the special CB4-1, the special CB4-2, the special CC4-1, and the special CC4-2 variation pattern type is “ The table data is configured so as to include a variation pattern type different from the case other than “accuracy”. Therefore, when the big hit type is “Accuracy”, it is determined that the variation pattern type or fluctuation pattern is different from the case other than “Accuracy”. In spite of being controlled by the state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful by performing the same production operation as in the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state.

  Further, based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, the CPU 56 changes the special variable winning device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in the small hit gaming state, similarly to the two round big hit state. The variable winning action is executed. When the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed by not changing the state of the probability change flag or the time reduction flag. Therefore, even when the normal state continues, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation for being controlled to the probability variation state and improve the game entertainment.

  Also, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 31D, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. 32B, and the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in FIG. Then, it is configured to include a variation pattern type common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the game is controlled to the two-round big hit state or the small hit game state depending on the variation pattern type, and the expectation for being controlled to the probable state is maintained. Can improve the entertainment interest. In addition, when the variable display result is “small hit” and when the big hit type is “surprise”, it is possible to determine the common variation pattern type, so that the variable pattern can be determined Regardless of whether the display result is “small hit” or the big hit type is “surprise”, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced. .

  When the big hit type is “probable”, for example, the production control CPU 101 determines whether the variation pattern is a plurality of types in the processing of steps S508 and S509 in FIG. 85, and finally determines according to the determination result. Decide the decorative pattern for the stop symbol. As a result, when the big hit type is “surprise”, various combinations of decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed as a variable display result, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  Further, the CPU 56 can specify a display result specifying command that can specify a variable display result from the main board 31 to the effect control board or a variation pattern by the process of step S106 in FIG. 70 or the process shown in FIG. Send the fluctuation pattern command. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 executes the notice effect setting process in step S516 in FIG. Then, the presentation operation to be the notice production is determined to be one of a plurality of types. For example, in step S593 in FIG. 88, the notice pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of kinds using the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. In some cases, after setting one of the notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58 in the process of step S595, the notice pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types in the process of step S596. Then, in accordance with the specific effect pattern determined based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, the notice pattern, etc., the effect is produced according to the change control pattern and the notice effect control pattern determined in step S517 in FIG. The process during symbol variation is executed. The control load for controlling the progress of the game by the microcomputer 560 for game control is increased by performing the determination, determination and setting for executing the notice effect by the effect control CPU 101 mounted on the effect control board 80. It is possible to improve amusement entertainment by executing a variety of presentation operations as a notice effect while preventing the player from doing so.

  The notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 55 is configured not to execute a notice effect having a specific effect and an execution period overlapping, as in the case where a specific effect of “Intro” is executed, for example. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a plurality of types of performance operations from overlapping, and to prevent a decrease in performance effects due to the player's interest being dispersed.

  In the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 48C, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the intro TP3-1 to intro are determined depending on which of the previous effect values is 1 to 3. The specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” executed last time is changed by assigning a determination value to be compared with the value of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern for each specific effect pattern of TP3-3. It is made so that it does not become the same specific production pattern. Therefore, various entertainment operations can be caused to appear so as not to be biased, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  The notice pattern classification determination table 170 shown in FIG. 55 and the notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIGS. 56 to 58 are configured so that the notice effect can be executed even when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach”. It is configured. As a result, even if the decorative display variable display state does not reach the reach state, it is possible to perform the effect operation that becomes a notice effect, thereby enhancing the player's expectation for reaching the reach state and improving the game entertainment Can do.

  The notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 58 is a variation pattern that corresponds to “non-reach” and that is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, so that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. The ratio of executing the notice effect is lower than that of the time, and the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than that of the change pattern corresponding to “non-reach” and the specific effect is not executed. It is configured. Therefore, the case where the decorative display variable display state does not become the reach state when the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is executed is reduced, and the case where the specific effect is not executed when the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is executed. By reducing it, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the player will reach a reach state when the notice effect is performed, and to improve the game entertainment.

  The effect control CPU 101 checks the press signal from the operation button 30 in the effect symbol changing process, and switches the notice effect control pattern in response to the press signal being turned on, so that in the notice effect. Change the direction. Therefore, the notice effect according to the operation by the player can be performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs the processing in steps S504, S505, and S506 in FIG. 84, and the step in FIG. 85 based on the variable display result notified by the display result specifying command and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command. By executing the processing of S510, S512, and S513, the decorative symbols of the final stop symbols are determined for each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 determines the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect operation in the specific effect by executing the process of step S558 in FIG. Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S576 in FIG. 87 to determine a decoration pattern of a normal jackpot combination to be temporarily stopped and displayed as an effect operation in the changing promotion effect. The effect control CPU 101 determines the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, thereby allowing the game control microcomputer 560 to progress the game. While preventing an increase in the control burden for control, it is possible to determine the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the plurality of symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R.

  In addition, when the “pseudo-ream” specific effect is executed, the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S558 in FIG. 86, so that the temporary stop symbol that becomes any one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 is displayed. Determine the combination. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game interest by performing various presentation operations while preventing an increase in the control load for controlling the progress of the game of the game control microcomputer 560.

  In addition, when the “slip” specific effect is executed, the effect control CPU 101 determines the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed with the “slip” specific effect by executing the process of step S558 in FIG. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the game interest by performing various presentation operations while preventing an increase in the control load for controlling the progress of the game of the game control microcomputer 560.

  In addition, in response to the fact that the decorative display variable display state becomes the reach state, the effect control CPU 101 first uses the final stop symbol determination table 162A in the process of step S506 in FIG. The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R other than the “middle” symbol display area 9C are displayed. Thereafter, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the ornament symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the ornament symbol is finally stopped and displayed is determined. In addition, in response to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols does not reach the reach state, the CPU 101 for effect control corresponds to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right appearance determination table 161 in the process of step S505 in FIG. The combination of reach and jackpot is not determined by determining the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed with reference to FIG. 26A, and even if it is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the simulation shown in FIG. Combinations of consecutive chances GC1 to GC8, development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 26B, random chances TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 26C, and certain non-reach combinations as shown in FIG. Decide which combination of decorative symbols should not be. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding whether or not the special effect is executed.

  In addition, when the effect control CPU 101 is the “first probability variation” jackpot type capable of executing the promotion effect during fluctuation, the decorative symbol of the final stop symbol constituting the combination of probability variation jackpots in the process of step S513 in FIG. To decide. Then, in the process of step S574 of FIG. 87, it is determined whether or not the changing promotion effect is executed by referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. If it is determined that the changing promotion effect is to be executed, the decorative symbols constituting the normal jackpot combination are changed by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 54 in the process of step S576. Decide on a decorative design to be temporarily stopped for medium promotion. Therefore, even when the “first probability change” jackpot type that can execute the changing promotion effect is provided, a case where the changing promotion effect is executed and a case where the changing promotion effect is not executed are provided. While preventing an increase in the control burden for controlling the progress, it is possible to perform a variety of performance operations and improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the case of the “third probability variation” jackpot type that executes the jackpot promotion promotion effect, the effect control CPU 101 determines the decoration pattern of the final stop symbol that constitutes the normal jackpot combination in step S512 in FIG. . Therefore, it is difficult to recognize from the variable display result of the decorative symbol whether or not the game is controlled to the probability variation state when the notification effect that the probability variation state is entered after the control to the big hit gaming state is started. Thus, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification effect and improve the game entertainment.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 mounted on the effect control board 80 executes the process of step S593 and the process of step S595 in FIG. Whether or not to perform the effect operation to be performed, and the effect operation to be the notice effect is determined to be any of a plurality of types, and the processing of steps S504, S505, and S506 in FIG. 84, and step S510 in FIG. By executing the processing of S512, S513, the processing of step S558 in FIG. 86, or the processing of step S576 in FIG. 87, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, a notice is given during variable display of decorative symbols by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided for controlling the production operation, for example. The determination of whether or not to perform the production operation as the production, and the decision to select any of the multiple types of production operations as the announcement production and the determination of the decorative pattern to be stopped are performed in a shared manner. Also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C are classified according to the type of the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state. It is configured to be able to determine any one of the changed pattern types. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> C are used to specify a specific effect operation type such as a specific effect of “Development chance” and a promotion effect during change. By the above, it may be configured to be able to determine any of the classified variation pattern types.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. 48B in step S554 in FIG. In the above description, it is assumed that the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is set to any one of “1” to “3” depending on which of the specific effect patterns is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the CPU 56 may determine the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation when the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern in step S105 in FIG. Good. In that case, it is possible to set a different special symbol variation time according to the number of times of pseudo-continuous variation execution. In this way, for the case where the variation time of the special symbol changes depending on the presence / absence of the production operation, the presence / absence and type of the production operation is determined on the main board 31 side, and the variation time of the special symbol is also determined depending on the presence / absence of the production operation. For those that do not change, the presence / absence and type of the rendering operation may be determined on the rendering control board 80 side.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 101 determines the notice pattern type including the presence or absence of the notice effect when the notice pattern type is determined in the process of step S593 in FIG. Even when the notice pattern is determined in S596, the notice pattern is determined including the presence or absence of the notice effect. However, the presence / absence of the notice effect, the type of the notice pattern, and the decision of the notice pattern may be determined in a single process. The type may be determined.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines the “Left” and “Right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R when determining the final stop symbol of the reach combination in the process of Step S506 in FIG. The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed together are determined, the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, and the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R. It was explained that the difference in design was also determined. However, for example, regarding the symbol difference between the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C and the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, For example, the CPU 56 may determine with the determination of the variation pattern and notify the side of the effect control board 80 by a predetermined effect control command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines the final stop symbol of the non-reach combination in step S505 in FIG. 84, the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R were individually determined. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, after determining the decorative symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L, the determined decorative symbol and the “middle” and “right” symbols are determined. You may make it determine the symbol difference with the design symbol in the display areas 9C and 9R with reference to a predetermined | prescribed determination table.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when executing the changing promotion effect, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 as shown in FIG. 54 in step S576 in FIG. When the stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 are determined so that the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 become a decorative symbol that normally constitutes a combination of jackpots, the ornament A normal design different from the design was determined as a decorative design to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and when the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 become a decorative symbol that normally constitutes a jackpot combination, it is the same as the decorative symbol. The normal symbol may be determined as a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing promotion effect. For example, in the temporary stop symbol determination table 169, the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are any one of “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8”. In this case, the determination values corresponding to all the random numbers SR2 for temporary stop symbol determination at the promotion effect are any of the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” that are the same as the final stop symbol. The left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 may be configured to be the same as the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3.

  In the above embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the game state is not changed after the small hit game state ends. In addition, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is set to “surprise” based on the fact that the big hit type is “surprise”, and after the two round big hit state is finished, the positive hit state is controlled. . However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit”, A case of “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” may be provided. For example, “suddenly short time” and “suddenly normal” are included in the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit”. In this case, the jackpot type determination table 131 may be configured to include a determination value to be assigned to the “sudden time reduction” or “sudden normal” jackpot type according to the variation special figure designation value. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state in the same way as the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the jackpot type is “surprise”, the normal state is controlled. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the gaming state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state, and to improve the gaming interest.

  When providing such “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” judgment values, it is possible to determine a variation pattern type or variation pattern different from those other than “suddenly short” and “suddenly normal”. Good. Even though the big hit type is “suddenly short time” or “suddenly normal”, the player performs the same performance operation as when controlled to the 15 round big hit state despite being controlled to the 2 round big hit state. Can be prevented from giving distrust. In addition, when the big hit type is "Suddenly short" or "Suddenly normal", when the variable display result is "Small hit", or when the big hit type is "Sudden", the common variation pattern type It may be possible to make a decision. As a result, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”, or the variable display result is “Small hit” or the big hit type is “Abrupt”. Regardless of whether this is the case, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  Further, in the above embodiment, after the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result having become “big hit”, the control is made to the probability change state or the short time state. Control that is advantageous to the player was performed by increasing the possibility that a game ball would enter the mouth 14 and making the second start condition easier to be established. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, in the probability variation state, the probability variation control is continuously performed, and the advantageous opening that increases the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning opening 14 is provided. A high-accuracy and high-base state in which control is performed and a high-accuracy and low-base state in which probability variation control is performed but advantageous opening control is not performed may be included. Also, in the short-time state, a low-accuracy base state in which the special symbol fluctuation time is shortened and advantageous release control is performed, and a low probability low in which the special symbol variation time is shortened but advantageous release control is not performed. The base state may be included. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “first probability change” to “third probability change” or “surprise probability”, after the big hit gaming state is finished, which of the high probability high base state and the high probability low base state You may make it control. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “first probability change” to “third probability change” or “surprise probability”, which of the high probability high base state and the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends The ratios that are controlled may be different from each other.

  When the big hit type is “Crush Probability”, when determining the variation pattern type to be one of multiple types, whether to control to the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends Accordingly, different variation pattern types may be determined. For example, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” in the process of step S74 in FIG. 69, it is determined whether to control to the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends. A determination process is executed. At this time, if it is decided to control to the high accuracy low base state, it is variable from the case where the big hit type such as the variation pattern type of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1 and the special CC 4-1 becomes “surprising accuracy”. When the display result is “small hit”, the common variation pattern type is determined. In addition, when it is determined to control to the high-accuracy high-base state, the dedicated variation pattern type is used only when the big hit type such as special CA4-2, special CB4-2, and special CC4-2 is “surprise”. You just have to decide. In that case, when the big hit type is “surprise” and the high hit low base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, the variable display is performed as the stage action during the variable display of the decorative pattern or the stage action in the two round big hit state. After the production operation common to the case where the result is “small hit” is performed, a highly accurate and low base state can be obtained. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise” and the high probability high base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, the big hit type is “surprise” After the dedicated performance operation is performed only in the case of “

  In the above-described embodiment, the variation pattern command and the display result specifying command are separate presentation control commands. One kind of effect control command that can specify either of them and the type of jackpot in the case of “big hit” may be used. Further, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control is performed based on the fact that the CPU 56 has determined the big hit type as “normal” or “first certain variation” to “third certain variation” in the process of step S74 in FIG. The CPU 101 selects the jackpot promotion promotion execution execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 49B in step S866 in FIG. 94, and determines whether or not the jackpot promotion promotion execution is executed in the processes of steps S868 and S869. . However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the determination control CPU 101 may determine whether to execute the jackpot promotion effect regardless of the determination result in the CPU 56. Good.

  In the above embodiment, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” are provided in the display area of the effect display device 9, and the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, When one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at 9R, the decorative symbol of the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed on one predetermined effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, “upper”, “middle”, and “lower” The decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed at these three locations, and the decorative symbols of the final stopped symbols may be stopped and displayed on five or eight active lines.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in response to the fact that the variation pattern type is determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 based on the value of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. The non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7 variation pattern for executing the specific performance is determined. That is, the presence / absence of the specific effect is determined by determining the variation pattern type using the value of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the presence or absence of a specific effect may be determined by determining a variation pattern using the value of random number MR4 for variation pattern determination. . For example, the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type is configured so that the non-reach PA1-1 variation pattern includes the non-reach PA1-1 variation pattern. In that case, at the time when the variation pattern type is determined to be the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type based on the value of the random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination, the presence or absence of a specific effect is still present. It is not determined and the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach PA1-1 based on the value of random number MR4 for variation pattern determination, so that it is determined that the specific effect is not executed, and the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach PA1-4˜. Execution of the specific effect is determined by determining one of the non-reach PAs 1-7.

  FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of effects produced by the rotators 84 and 85. In the example shown in FIG. 104 (A), the effect control microcomputer 100 rotates the rotating bodies 84 and 85 at a low speed when the normal reach effect is executed in the effect device such as the effect display device 9. When the rotating bodies 84 and 85 rotate at a low speed, for example, the blinking cycle of the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c and 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c and 85d is extremely long. In the example shown in FIG. 104 (B), when a specific effect (specific effects other than “pseudo-run” and “expansion chance”) is being executed in an effect device such as the effect display device 9, an effect control microcomputer. 100 rotates the rotating bodies 84 and 85 normally (normal speed rotation). When the rotating bodies 84 and 85 normally rotate, for example, the blinking cycle of the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, and 85d is long.

  In the example shown in FIG. 104C, when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed in the effect device such as the effect display device 9, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the rotating bodies 84 and 85. Rotate at medium speed. When the rotating bodies 84 and 85 rotate at medium speed, for example, the blinking cycle of the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, and 85d is medium. In the example shown in FIG. 104 (D), when the specific effect or promotion effect of “Development Chance” is executed in the effect device such as the effect display device 9, the effect control microcomputer 100 includes the rotating body 84, Rotate 85 at high speed. When the rotating bodies 84 and 85 rotate at a high speed, for example, the blinking cycle of the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c and 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c and 85d is extremely short.

  During the change of the decorative design, the effect using the effect device such as the effect display device 9 is executed according to the process table (see FIG. 89) corresponding to the change pattern. That is, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control according to data obtained by combining a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and rotating body control data, thereby providing an effect device such as the effect display device 9 or the like. An effect using is performed.

  The process table prepared in accordance with each effect control pattern also includes rotating body control data indicating a method for controlling the rotating bodies 84 and 85. Therefore, by performing the effect according to the process table, the effect by the rotation of the rotating bodies 84 and 85 is also performed. In other words, the production control CPU 101 rotates the rod-like rotators 84 and 85 across the display area 61 and the display area outside (transparent area) based on the rotator control data. For example, when the effect shown in FIG. 104A is realized, in the process table corresponding to the normal reach effect, the data indicating “low speed rotation” is included in the rotating body control data used when the reach effect is started. Data indicating “stop” is set in the rotating body control data that is set and is used when the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are finalized (finally stopped).

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d to blink when the rotating bodies 84, 85 are rotated. Specifically, in the process table, data indicating the speed (excluding stopping) of the rotating bodies 84 and 85 (corresponding to data indicating activation of the rotating bodies 84 and 85) is described in the rotating body control data. The lamp control execution data immediately before in the process table describes process data for lighting the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d. When data indicating stop of 85 is described, the process data for turning off the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d is included in the lamp control execution data immediately before in the process table. It will be described. Further, in the process table, from a position after the position (address) where the rotating body control data indicating the activation of the rotating bodies 84 and 85 is set to a position where data indicating the stop of the rotating bodies 84 and 85 is set. In the meantime, a process timer value corresponding to the blinking cycle and lamp control execution data including data indicating lighting / extinguishing of the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d are set.

  Further, the effect illustrated in FIG. 104 is an example, and other effects using the rotating bodies 84 and 85 (effects other than the effect illustrated in FIG. 104) can be executed. For example, an effect using the rotating bodies 84 and 85 is performed in a notice effect, an effect executed during a big hit game, and other effects in addition to a reach effect executed during the change of special symbols and decorative symbols. Also good. In addition, when performing in other effects, the process table corresponding to the corresponding effect control pattern includes the rotating body control data indicating the activation and stop of the rotating bodies 84 and 85, the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d, and the LEDs 85a, Lamp control execution data including data indicating lighting / extinguishing of 85b, 85c, and 85d is set.

  FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the rotator control data. FIG. 105 also shows address data of the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 that gives a control signal to the motors 86 and 87 that rotate the rotating bodies 84 and 85 together with the rotating body control data.

  The production control microcomputer 100 controls the motors 86 and 87 by outputting the rotating body control data to the serial data line 300. As a result, the rotating bodies 84 and 85 are rotated or stopped at a desired speed. be able to.

  In FIG. 105, rotating body control data relating to one rotating body is shown, but rotating body control data corresponding to each of the rotating bodies 84 and 85 is set in the process table.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the rotating body stop process in step S709. In the rotating body stop process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the low speed changed flag is set (step S901). If the low speed changed flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the rotating body stop request flag is set (step S902). The rotating body stop request flag is set in the effect symbol changing process (see FIG. 91). Specifically, it is set at the time when the variation time has elapsed (more specifically, immediately before that). The process table is set so that the rotating body control data indicating “stop” at such time is read out by the effect control CPU 101.

  When the rotating body stop request flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the rotational speeds of the motors 86 and 87 at that time are low (step S903). If the speed is low, the rotary body stop request flag is reset (step S905), and the low speed changed flag is set (step S906).

  If the rotational speeds of the motors 86 and 87 at that time are not low, the effect control CPU 101 outputs data for reducing the rotational speeds of the motors 86 and 87 to the serial data line 300 (step S904). ), The processing of steps S905 and S906 is executed.

  The case where the rotational speeds of the motors 86 and 87 at that time are low is, for example, the case where the rotating bodies 84 and 85 perform an effect of rotating at a low speed. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 sets data indicating the rotation speed in the RAM when control for changing the rotation speeds of the motors 86 and 87 is performed, and the rotation speeds of the motors 86 and 87 are set based on the data. Is determined.

  If it is confirmed in step S901 that the low-speed changed flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the position sensors 861 and 871 are connected via the input IC 621 and the relay board 606 mounted on the board-side IC board 601. When the detection signal is input and the detection signals of the position sensors 861 and 871 indicate the ON state (indicating that the positions of the rotating bodies 84 and 85 match the positions of the position sensors 861 and 871), the serial data line 300 is connected. Then, data for stopping the rotation of the motors 86 and 87 is output (steps S908 and S909). Then, the low speed changed flag is reset (step S910), and the process ends.

  With the control described above, the motors 86 and 87 are once rotated at a low speed, and then the motors 86 and 87 are stopped based on the detection signals of the position sensors 861 and 871.

  Further, the position sensors 861 and 871 are arranged such that when the rod-shaped rotators 84 and 85 are positioned at the upper part and the lower part of the frame portion 82D, that is, from the front side of the gaming machine, the player pulls the rotators 84 and 85. It is installed at a position that outputs a detection signal when the position becomes invisible. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 can perform control to stop the player from the front side of the gaming machine at a position (initial position) where the rotating bodies 84 and 85 cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a notification screen displayed on the effect display device 9. FIG. 107 (A) shows an example of an initial screen that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to the reception of the initialization designation command. FIG. 107 (B) shows an example of a power failure recovery screen that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of the power failure recovery designation command. FIG. 107 (C) shows an example of an abnormality notification screen that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to the reception of the abnormal winning notification designation command, and the variation of the decorative design is started. Also, it is shown that the display of the abnormality notification screen is continued (see the right side of FIG. 107 (C)).

  Next, the notification control process process in step S707 will be described. First, various error notification modes executed in the notification control process will be described. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of various error notification modes executed in the notification control process. As shown in FIG. 108, the RAM clear notification is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 31 seconds) from the power-on of the gaming machine. When performing the RAM clear notification, the effect control CPU 101 lights the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) on the game frame 11 side, and causes a predetermined error sound to the speaker 27. Control (for example, beep sound) is output.

  Further, the door opening error notification is executed while the game frame 11 is opened (for example, while the detection signal of the door opening sensor 157 is input). When performing the door opening error notification, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to blink the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) on the game frame 11 side. In addition, control is performed so that a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound) is output to the speaker 27 together with a sound “the door is open”.

  Further, the ball break error notification is executed from the occurrence of a ball break until the ball break state is canceled (for example, while a detection signal of a ball break switch is input). The effect control CPU 101 performs control of blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l of the top frame lamp on the game frame 11 side when notifying the ball break error. The full tank error notification is executed from the occurrence of the full tank state of the lower pan until the full tank state is canceled (for example, while the detection signal of the full tank switch is input). When performing the full tank error notification, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to blink the LEDs 82a to 82d of the lower pan lamps on the game frame 11 side and to output a voice saying that the lower pan is full. In addition, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display “The bottom plate is full”. In this case, when display by the game effect (for example, variable display of decorative symbols) is performed on the effect display device 9, the character string “bottom plate is full” is superimposed on the effect display device 9. .

  The prize ball error notification is executed from the occurrence of the prize ball abnormality until the prize ball abnormality state is canceled. When performing the prize ball error notification, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to blink the LEDs 281a to 281l of the top frame lamp on the game frame 11 side.

  The abnormal winning error notification is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the occurrence of the abnormal winning. When performing the abnormal winning notification, the effect control CPU 101 blinks the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) on the game frame 11 side, and a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep). (Sound) is output.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the notification control process (step S707) in the main process shown in FIG. In the notification control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S1900 and S1901 according to the value of the notification control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  The notification start processing (step S1900) includes error flags (initial notification flag, abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag, RAM clear flag, full tank error notification flag, prize ball error notification flag, ball runout error set in the command analysis processing. This is a process of starting error notification based on the notification flag. When the error notification is started, the value of the notification control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the notification process (step S1901).

  The in-notification process (step S1901) is an error notification based on each error flag (initial notification flag, abnormality notification flag, RAM clear flag, full tank error notification flag, prize ball error notification flag, out-of-ball error notification flag). Is a process of continuing. Further, the error notification is terminated based on the fact that an error notification period (initial notification period, RAM clear notification period) has elapsed or an error notification release flag set in the command analysis process. When the error notification is finished, the value of the notification control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the notification start process (step S1901).

  110 and 111 are flowcharts showing the notification start process (step S1900) in the notification control process shown in FIG. In the notification start process, the production control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the initial notification flag is set (step S1911). If set, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the initial notification period value in the period timer 1 (step S1912). The initial notification period is a period in which initialization notification is performed in response to reception of the initialization designation command. The effect control CPU 101 ends the initialization notification when the initial notification period elapses. The initial notification period is the same as the prohibition period set by the game control microcomputer 560 in step S45. Therefore, the abnormality notification designation command is not received when the initialization notification is performed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets the initial notification flag and sets an initial notification flag indicating that the initial notification is being performed (step S1912A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  When the initial notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the door opening error notification flag is set (step S1913). If set, the effect control CPU 101 selects an error process table corresponding to the door opening error (step S1914). In this embodiment, there is an error process table (error process table) for controlling the speaker 27 and the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, and 82a to 82d when performing various error notifications. Prepared in advance. Note that the error process table is composed of a set of process timer set values, lamp control execution data, and sound number data, as in the process table for effects. However, there is no data corresponding to the display control execution data and the rotating body control data.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts an error process timer (step S1915) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the error process data 1 (step S1916). For example, the production control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound) together with a sound such as “the door is open”.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, and 82a to 82d (see FIG. 118). ) Is executed (step S1917). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sends lamp control signals for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. Set to. The lamp control signal set in step S1917 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602 to 604.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the door opening error notification flag and sets a door opening error notification flag indicating that the door opening error notification is being performed (step S1917A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  When the door opening error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set (step S1924). If set, the production control CPU 101 selects an error process table corresponding to the abnormal winning notification (step S1925). Next, the production control CPU 101 starts an error process timer (step S1926) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the error process data 1 (step S1927). For example, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, and 82a to 82d ( Step S1928). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sends lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. Set to. The lamp control signal set in step S1928 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to each of the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  Therefore, thereafter, sound output (output of an abnormal alarm sound) and lamp display (abnormal alarm flashing) corresponding to the abnormal winning notification are performed. Then, the production control CPU 101 resets the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag and sets an abnormal notification flag indicating that abnormal notification is being performed (step S1929). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  When the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step S1930). If set, the effect control CPU 101 selects an error process table corresponding to the RAM clear notification (step S1931). The RAM clear notification is processing for notifying that the initialization process has been executed and the RAM has been cleared.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts an error process timer (step S1932) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the error process data 1 (step S1933). For example, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, and 82a to 82d ( Step S1934). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sends lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. Set to. The lamp control signal set in step S1934 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602 to 604. Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the RAM clear notification period value in the period timer 2 (step S1935). The RAM clear notification period is a period during which the RAM clear notification is being notified. When the RAM clear notification period elapses, the effect control CPU 101 ends the RAM clear notification. The initial notification period and the RAM clear notification period may be the same period.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the RAM clear flag and sets a RAM clear notification flag indicating that the RAM clear notification is being performed (step S1935A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  When the RAM clear flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the full error notification flag is set (step S1936). If it is set, the CPU 101 for effect control performs control to display a full tank error display screen indicating that it is a full error on the effect display device 9 (step S1937). Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects an error process table corresponding to a full tank error (step S1938). Next, the production control CPU 101 starts an error process timer (step S1939) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the error process data 1 (step S1940). For example, the production control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a sound such as “the bottom plate is full”.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, and 82a to 82d ( Step S1941). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sets lamp control signals for causing the lamps 82a to 82d of the dish lamps provided in the game frame 11 to blink in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1941 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. To the frame-side IC substrate 605.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets the full tank error notification flag and sets a full tank error notification flag indicating that a full tank error notification is being performed (step S1941A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  When the full tank error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the prize ball error notification flag is set (step S1942). If set, the effect control CPU 101 selects an error process table corresponding to the prize ball error (step S1943) and starts an error process timer (step S1944).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, and 82a to 82d ( Step S1945). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1945 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the prize ball error notification flag and sets a prize ball error notification flag indicating that the prize ball error notification is being performed (step S1945A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  In this embodiment, a case where only a notification process using a lamp is performed and a notification process using sound using the speaker 27 is not performed when a prize ball error is notified will be described. The used notification may be performed.

  When the prize ball error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the ball break error notification flag is set (step S1946). If set, the production control CPU 101 selects an error process table corresponding to the ball-out error (step S1947) and starts an error process timer (step S1948).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, and 82a to 82d ( Step S1949). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1949 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the ball-out error notification flag and sets a ball-out error notification flag indicating that the ball-out error notification is being performed (step S1949A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  In this embodiment, a case where only a notification process using a lamp is performed and a notification process using a sound using the speaker 27 is not performed when a ball break error is notified will be described. The used notification may be performed.

  In step S1950, the effect control CPU 101 changes the value of the notification control process flag to a value corresponding to the processing during notification (step S1901), and ends the processing.

  112 to 114 are flowcharts showing the in-notification processing (step S1901) in the notification control process shown in FIG. In the notifying process, the production control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the initial notifying flag is set (step S1960). If the initial notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1965. When the initial notification flag is set, the value of the period timer 1 set in the process of step S1912 is decremented by 1 (step S1961). When the value of the period timer 1 becomes 0, that is, when the initial notification period has elapsed, the initial notification flag is reset (steps S1962, S1963). If the value of the period timer 1 is not 0, the process is terminated as it is.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for erasing the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen in the effect display device 9 to the VDP 109 (step S1964). The VDP 109 erases the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen from the effect display device 9 according to the command. Then, the process proceeds to step S2010.

  If the initial notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the door opening error notification flag is set (step S1965). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1977. If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S1966), and when the error process timer times out (step S1967), switches the error notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S1968).

  FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of an error notification process table. The error notification process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 performs control of the effect device and performs various error notifications is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 performs error notification by controlling the speaker 27 and each lamp in accordance with data set in the error notification process table. The error notification process table includes data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, error lamp control execution data, and error sound number data. In the process timer set value, the duration in the sound output state and the lamp display state is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the error notification process table and controls the lighting / non-lighting state of each lamp in a manner set in the lamp display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. The sound output using the speaker 27 is controlled.

  The error notification process table shown in FIG. 115 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The error notification process table is prepared according to the error type (RAM clear notification, full tank error, door opening error, ball runout error, prize ball error). Further, in this embodiment, every time the error process timer times out, the lighting of the pattern A and the lighting of the pattern B are switched, and the lighting or blinking is controlled.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 based on the error sound number data (step S1969). In step S1969, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding error notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the production control CPU 101 causes the speaker 27 to output a sound “the door is open” and a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S1970). For example, in step S1970, the effect control CPU 101 generates lamp control signals for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. Set to a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1970 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the door opening error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the abnormality notification flag is set (step S1977). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1984. If set, the effect display device 9 outputs a command to superimpose and display the abnormality notification screen on the screen displayed at that time to the VDP 109 (step S1978). In response to the command, the VDP 109 superimposes and displays an abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 107C).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S1979) and switches the error notification process data when the error process timer times out (step S1980). That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S1981).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 based on the error sound number data (step S1982). In step S1982, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the effect control CPU 101 causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the production control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing in order to control each lamp in accordance with the abnormal winning notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S1983). In step S1983, the CPU 101 for effect control provides lamp control signals for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. Set in the data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1983 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the abnormality notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the RAM clear notification flag is set (step S1984). If the RAM clear notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1993. If the RAM clear notification flag is set, the process timer is decremented by -1 (step S1985), and the value of the timer 2 set in step S1935 is decremented by 1 (step S1986). When the process timer times out (step S1987), error notification process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the process timer (step S1988).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 based on the error sound number data (step S1989). In step S1989, the production control CPU 101 outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the speech synthesis IC 173 to cause the speaker 27 to output a sound. For example, the effect control CPU 101 causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing in order to control various lamps as effect parts in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S1990). In step S1990, the CPU 101 for effect control provides predetermined lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. Set in the data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1990 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602 to 604.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the period timer 2 has become 0 (step S1991). When the value of the period timer 2 becomes 0, that is, when the RAM clear notification period has elapsed, the RAM clear notification flag is reset (step S1992), and the process proceeds to step S2010. If the value of the period timer 2 has not timed out, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the RAM clear notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the full error notification flag is set (step S1993). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1999. If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S1994), and when the error process timer times out (step S1995), switches the error notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S1996).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 based on the error sound number data (step S1997). In step S1997, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding error notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the production control CPU 101 causes the speaker 27 to output a sound “the bottom plate is full”.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S1998). For example, in step S1998, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the lamps 82a to 82d of the pan lamp in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1998 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the full tank error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the prize ball error notification flag is set (step S1999). If not set, the process proceeds to step S2005. If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S2000), and when the error process timer times out (step S2001), switches the error notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S2002).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S2003). For example, in step S2003, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S2003 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the award ball error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the ball out error notification flag is set (step S2004). If not set, the process proceeds to step S2010. If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S2005), and when the error process timer times out (step S2006), switches the error notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S2007).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S2008). For example, in step S2008, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S2008 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  In this embodiment, when a ball break error or a prize ball error is notified, sound output from the speaker 27 is not performed, but the speaker 27 is also used when a ball break error or a prize ball error is notified. The used sound output control may be performed.

  In step S2009, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not an error notification release flag is set. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S2010. If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. In step S2010, the production control CPU 101 changes the value of the notification control process flag to a value corresponding to the notification start process (step S1900), and ends the process.

  By executing the processing as described above, notification of various errors is executed. In addition, the error notification is performed in the order of initial notification, door opening error notification, abnormal winning notification, RAM clear notification, full tank error notification, prize ball error notification, and out-of-ball error notification.

  Next, a lamp control signal set in a predetermined data storage area according to the error lamp control execution data will be described. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a lamp control signal output as a serial data system in the notification control process. As shown in FIG. 116, in this embodiment, two patterns of error lamp control execution data (pattern A and pattern B) are used for each error type. In this embodiment, the blinking display of the lamp is controlled by switching and using the error lamp control execution data for the pattern A and the pattern B. The effect control microcomputer 100 stores the lamp control signal shown in FIG. 116 in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area provided in advance in the ROM in association with the error lamp control execution data. Then, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a lamp control signal from a predetermined lamp control signal storage area based on the error lamp control execution data, and outputs it to the serial output circuit 353.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 116, each lamp control signal is stored in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area with the addresses of the output destination serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 added thereto. For example, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 that supplies a control signal to some of the LEDs 281a to 281f among the ceiling lamps is “01”, the address “0001” is stored in the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp. "Is added and stored. Further, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 that supplies the control signal to the other part of the top frame lamps 281g to 281l is “02”, the address of the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp is addressed. Stored with “0010” added. Further, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 613 that supplies the control signal to the LEDs 283a to 283f of the right frame lamp is “03”, the address “0011” is added to the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp. Stored in state. Since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 that supplies the control signal to the LEDs 282a to 282f of the left frame lamp is “04”, the address “0100” is added to the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp. Stored in state.

  In the case of RAM clear notification, as shown in FIG. 116, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 having addresses “01” to “04”. Is done. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l and 282a to 282f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. , 283a to 283f are turned on. In addition, when the RAM clear notification is made, the same lamp control signal is output when the error lamp control execution data is pattern A and pattern B. Therefore, during the error notification, the game frame 11 side The LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding dish lamps) provided in are continuously lit.

  In the ramp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611, the first bit is an input signal to the LED 281a, the second bit is an input signal to the LED 281b, the third bit is an input signal to the LED 281c, and the fourth bit is The input signal to the LED 281d corresponds to the input signal to the LED 281e, the fifth bit corresponds to the input signal to the LED 281f. In the ramp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612, the first bit is an input signal to the LED 281g, the second bit is an input signal to the LED 281h, the third bit is an input signal to the LED 281i, and the fourth bit is The input signal to the LED 281j, the fifth bit corresponds to the input signal to the LED 281k, and the sixth bit corresponds to the input signal to the LED 281l. In the ramp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613, the first bit is an input signal to the LED 283a, the second bit is an input signal to the LED 283b, the third bit is an input signal to the LED 283c, and the fourth bit is The input signal to the LED 283d corresponds to the input signal to the LED 283e, the fifth bit corresponds to the input signal to the LED 283f. In the ramp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614, the first bit is an input signal to the LED 282a, the second bit is an input signal to the LED 282b, the third bit is an input signal to the LED 282c, and the fourth bit is The input signal to the LED 282d corresponds to the input signal to the LED 282e, the fifth bit corresponds to the input signal to the LED 282f.

  When notifying the door opening error, as shown in FIG. 116, first, based on the error lamp control execution data of the pattern A, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 611 having addresses from “01” to “04”. In 614, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l and 282a to 282f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. , 283a to 283f are turned on. Further, when the process data is switched, the control data body is “00000000” in each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 614 having addresses “01” to “04” based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B. A lamp control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 0 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are turned off. Is done. When notifying the door opening error by repeating such control, the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are blinked at predetermined time intervals. Control is performed.

  When notifying a ball break error, as shown in FIG. 116, first, serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 having addresses “01” and “02” based on the error lamp control execution data for pattern A, respectively. In addition, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are turned on. In addition, when the process data is switched, the serial data to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 whose addresses are “01” and “02” and the lamp whose control data body is “00000000” based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B. A control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of the ceiling lamp are all 0 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are turned off. When such a control is repeatedly performed to notify a ball-out error, control is performed such that only the LEDs 281a to 281l of the top frame lamps provided on the game frame 11 side blink at predetermined time intervals.

  When notifying a full tank error, as shown in FIG. 116, first, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A, the control data body is “00001111”. Lamp control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of all the bits corresponding to the dish lamp LEDs 82a to 82d are 1, and the dish lamp LEDs 82a to 82d are turned on. At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is “05” based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LED of the dish lamp are all 0 is output, and the LEDs 82a to 82d of the dish lamp are turned off. When such a control is repeatedly performed and a full tank error is notified, control is performed such that only the LED lamps 82a to 82d of the pan lamp blink at a predetermined time interval.

  In the ramp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615, the first bit is an input signal to the LED 82a, the second bit is an input signal to the LED 82b, the third bit is an input signal to the LED 82c, and the fourth bit is The input signal to the LED 82d and the fifth bit correspond to the input signal to the LED 83.

  When notifying the winning ball error, as shown in FIG. 116, first, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A, the control data body is “00111111” in the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 whose address is “01”. Is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 whose address is “02”, and the lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to some of the LEDs of the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and only some of the LEDs 281a to 281f of the ceiling lamp provided on the game frame 11 side are lit. Is done. At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 whose address is “01” based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B, and the address is A lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 of “02”. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of all the bits corresponding to the other part of the ceiling lamps are all 1 is output, and the other part of the ceiling lamps 281g to 281g˜ Only 281l is lit. When such a control is repeatedly performed to notify a prize ball error, the LED 281a to 281f and the LEDs 281g to 281l of the top frame lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are alternately blinked at predetermined time intervals. Is done.

  When notifying an abnormal winning error, as shown in FIG. 116, first, serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 having addresses from “01” to “04” based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A. A lamp control signal whose control data body is “00101010” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of all the bits corresponding to some of the LEDs of the lamp provided on the game frame 11 side are 1 is output, and some of the LEDs 281b of each lamp provided on the game frame 11 side. , D, f, h, j, l, 282b, d, f, 283b, d, f only are lit. As described above, in the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611, 1 in the second bit is an input signal to the LED 281b, 1 in the fourth bit is an input signal to the LED 281d, and 1 in the sixth bit is This corresponds to an input signal to the LED 281f. In the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612, the second bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 281h, the fourth bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 281j, and the sixth bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 281l. It corresponds to. In the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613, the second bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 283b, the fourth bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 283d, and the sixth bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 283f. It corresponds to. In the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614, the 1st bit is the input signal to the LED 282b, the 1st bit is the input signal to the LED 282d, and the 1st bit is the input signal to the LED 282f. It corresponds to.

  Further, when the process data is switched, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B, the lamp control whose control data body is “00010101” in the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 with addresses “01” to “04”. A signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of all the bits corresponding to some other LEDs of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are all 1 is output, and each lamp provided on the game frame 11 side. Only some of the other LEDs 281a, c, e, g, i, k, 282a, c, e, 283a, c, e are lit. As described above, in the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611, 1 in the first bit is an input signal to the LED 281a, 1 in the third bit is an input signal to the LED 281c, and 1 in the fifth bit is It corresponds to the input signal to the LED 281e. In the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612, the first bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 281g, the third bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 281i, and the fifth bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 281k. It corresponds to. In the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613, the first bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 283a, the third bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 283c, and the fifth bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 283e. It corresponds to. In the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614, the first bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 282a, the third bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 282c, and the fifth bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 282e. It corresponds to.

  When a prize ball error is notified by repeatedly performing the control as described above, the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are alternately staggered at predetermined time intervals. Control is performed so as to blink.

  In the example shown in FIG. 116, when performing error notification, the lamp control signal is also supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 of lamps that are not subject to display control. For example, when the RAM clear notification is given, it is not necessary to control the lighting or blinking of the pan lamp. However, in the example shown in FIG. A lamp control signal whose bit logical values are all 0 is output. By doing so, it is possible to make sure that the LED that is not the control target at the time of error notification is turned off.

  When performing error notification, lamp control signals may not be output (transmitted) to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 of lamps that are not subject to display control. FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a lamp control signal output as a serial data method in the notification control process.

  When the RAM clear notification, the door opening error notification, or the abnormal winning error notification is performed, the dish lamp is not a display control target. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 117, the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is “05”. The lamp control signal is not output to. In addition, when the ball break error notification or the prize ball error notification is performed, since the left frame lamp and the right frame lamp are not subject to display control in addition to the dish lamp, the address is “03” as shown in FIG. The lamp control signal is not output to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 613 to 615 that are "to" 05 ". In addition, when performing full tank error notification, only the dish lamp is subject to display control. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 117, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 whose addresses are “01” to “04” are displayed. Does not output the lamp control signal. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the lamp control signals output from the production control microcomputer 100 to the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, the case where various error notifications are performed using only the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, and 82a to 82d of the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side has been described. However, in addition to these, various error notifications may be performed using center decoration lamps or stage lamp LEDs 125a to 125f and 126a to 126f provided on the game board 6 side.

  Next, the serial setting process will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the serial setting process. In the serial setting process, for example, when decorative display of variable designs is performed in the effect control process (see steps S522 and S845E) and various error notifications are performed (steps S1970, S1976, S1983, S1990, S1998, S2003, S2008). ) Is executed.

  In the serial setting process, the production control CPU 101 first reads out lamp control execution data (such as lamp lighting pattern data associated with the variation pattern, data for rotating body control) from the ROM (step S950). In this case, for example, when performing the serial setting process during the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the effect control CPU 101 reads the lamp control execution data of the process table shown in FIG. When serial setting processing is performed in the notification control process, error lamp control execution data in the error notification process table shown in FIG. 115 is read.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not there is a change in the display state of each lamp based on the read lamp control execution data (step S951). If the display state of each lamp is changed, the CPU 101 for effect control extracts the lamp control signal to which the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC of the lamp to be displayed is added from a predetermined lamp control signal storage area ( Step S952). Next, the header data (1FF (H)), mark bit, and end bit shown in FIG. 20 are added to the extracted ramp control signal, and a predetermined data storage area provided in the RAM is set (step S953). Then, a lamp control signal output request flag is set (step S954).

  For example, when the serial setting process is executed in steps S907, S922, and S929 in the notification control process, one of the lamp control signals with an address shown in FIG. 116 is read in step S952, and the data is read in step S953. It will be set in the storage area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads the rotating body control data when the process table shown in FIG. 89 is used (for example, during the execution of variable display of decorative symbols) (step S955). Note that when the serial setting process is performed in the notification control process, the processes in steps S955 to S959 are not executed.

  The effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the read rotating body control data is data indicating a speed change (step S956). In the case of the data indicating the speed change, the effect control CPU 101 is added with the serial-parallel conversion IC address ("06": see FIG. 17) for the motors 86 and 87 for driving the rotating bodies 84 and 85. The obtained motor control signal is extracted from a predetermined motor control signal storage area (step S957). Next, the header data (1FF (H)), mark bit, and end bit shown in FIG. 20 are added to the extracted motor control signal, and a predetermined data storage area provided in the RAM is set (step S958). Then, a motor control signal output request flag is set (step S959).

  FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a data storage area in which a lamp control signal and a motor control signal to be output are set. In this example, nine data storage areas for storing the lamp control signal or the motor control signal are prepared, and the lamp control signal and the motor are sequentially output to the panel side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605. Control signals are sequentially stored in step S953.

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of the serial input / output process (step S708). In the serial input / output process, the production control CPU 101 first checks whether the lamp control signal output request flag or the motor control signal output request flag is set (step S970). If set, the lamp control signal output request flag or the motor control signal output request flag is reset (step S971), and the lamp control signal and the motor control signal stored in the data storage area are transferred to the serial output circuit 353. Output (step S972). In this case, when a plurality of lamp control signals are set in the data storage area, the effect control CPU 101 sequentially reads each lamp control signal and outputs it to the serial output circuit 353 in step S972. The output lamp control signal and motor control signal are converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353 and serially transmitted to the board side IC board 601 and the frame side IC boards 602 to 605 via the relay boards 606 and 607. It will be output as a data method.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 causes the input capture signal output unit 357 to output an input capture signal (latch signal) to the board side IC substrate 601 via the relay substrates 606 and 607 (step S973). The input IC 621 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 latches the detection signals of the position sensors 861 and 871 based on the input input signal being input, and passes through the relay boards 606 and 607 as a serial data system. And output to the effect control board 80. Then, the effect control CPU 101 reads the input data from the serial input circuit 354 and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM (step S974). In step S974, the effect control CPU 101 controls the serial input circuit 354 to read the input data from the serial input circuit 354 after delaying the time by which the serial input circuit 354 receives the input data from the input IC 621.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 causes the input capture signal output unit 357 to output an input capture signal (latch signal) to the frame side IC substrate 605 via the relay substrate 607 (step S975). The input IC 620 mounted on the board-side IC board 605 latches the detection signal of the operation button 30 based on the input input signal being input, and produces the effect control board 80 via the relay board 607 as a serial data system. Will be output. Then, the effect control CPU 101 reads the input data from the serial input circuit 354 and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM (step S976). In step S976, the effect control CPU 101 controls the serial input circuit 354 to read the input data from the serial input circuit 354 after delaying by the time for which the serial input circuit 354 receives the input data from the input IC 620.

  FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the situation of the display effect in the effect display device 9, the sound effect by the speaker 27, and the display effect by each lamp. FIG. 121 (A) shows an example when the decorative display is variably displayed on the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 121 (B) shows an example in which initialization notification is performed in the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 121 (B), when the initialization designation command is received and initialization notification is performed in the effect display device 9, a predetermined period (for example, 31 seconds) after receiving the initialization designation command, The LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided in the game frame 11 are turned on, and a predetermined error sound is output from the speaker 27, and the RAM is cleared. Inform you.

  In FIG. 121 (C), an abnormality notification is performed in the effect display device 9, an abnormality notification sound is output by the speaker 27, and an abnormality notification display (for example, by LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f of each lamp) An example in the case of blinking) is shown. When receiving the abnormal prize notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs control to display an abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9, and outputs an abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27. Control is performed to display abnormality notification on the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of each lamp. Further, even if the decorative display variable display is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9, the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27, and the LEDs 281a to 281l of each lamp, The abnormality notification display of 282a to 282f and 283a to 283f is continued. Even after the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9, the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27, and the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of each lamp. The abnormality notification display is continued.

  Since the production control microcomputer 100 does not execute control for deleting the abnormality notification screen, control for stopping the output of the abnormality notification sound, and control for stopping the abnormality notification display, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 is not performed. The output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 and the abnormality notification display of the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of each lamp continue until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. However, when the predetermined time has elapsed after the display of the abnormality notification screen, the output of the abnormality notification sound, and the abnormality notification display is started, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the abnormality notification screen, the output of the abnormality notification sound, and the abnormality notification. You may control to stop a display.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 does not detect an abnormal prize and does not detect an abnormal prize for a predetermined period after the power supply to the game machine is started (a period during which the initialization notification is executed). The abnormal winning notification designating command is not transmitted from the microcomputer 560. However, the game control microcomputer 560 always detects an abnormal winning when the value of the special symbol process flag is less than a predetermined value (5 in this embodiment), so that the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the game control. If an abnormal winning notification designation command is received during a predetermined period after the power supply to the machine is started, the abnormal winning notification may not be performed.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 detects that one game ball has won a big winning opening when it is not in the big win game state, the abnormal control notification designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer. Although it is transmitted to 100, when it is detected that a predetermined number (a plurality of) game balls have won the big winning opening when not in the big hit gaming state, an abnormal winning notification designation command may be transmitted. Further, when it is not in the big hit gaming state, when it is detected that a predetermined number (a plurality of) gaming balls have won within a predetermined time, an abnormal winning notification designating command may be transmitted. When receiving the abnormal winning notification designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the abnormality notification screen, outputs the abnormality notification sound, and displays the abnormality notification as described above.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 is configured to use the LED 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, and 281a of each lamp based on the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560. Control signals for controlling ˜281 l, 282 a to 282 f and 283 a to 283 f are output in a serial signal system. Further, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are connected through one system wiring. At the same time, different address information is assigned in advance, and only the control signal with its own address information added is converted into a parallel signal system and output. In addition, when the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a control signal for controlling the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 provided in the game board 6, address information that can identify the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 is provided. The added control signal is output by the serial signal system. In addition, when the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a control signal for controlling the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 provided in the game frame 11, address information that can identify the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 is provided. The added control signal is output by the serial signal system. Therefore, the number of wirings between the game board 6 and the game frame 11 can be reduced. Therefore, in a gaming machine in which the game frame 11 and the game board 6 are configured to be detachable, it is possible to easily attach and detach the game frame 11 and the game board 6.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 and the serial-parallel mounted on the frame-side IC boards 602 to 604 are formed by the relay boards 606 and 607. The connection with the conversion ICs 611 to 615 is relayed. Further, the relay board 607 relays the connection between the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC boards 602 to 604 and the effect control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the detachment work between the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be easily performed only by performing the connection work and the removal work to the relay boards 606 and 607.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the frame side IC substrate 602 as a collective substrate on which two serial-parallel conversions 611 and 612 are mounted is provided on the game frame 11 side. A board-side IC board 601 as a collective board on which four serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 are mounted is provided on the game board 6 side. Therefore, the boards on which the serial-parallel conversion ICs are mounted can be integrated, and the number of parts in the gaming machine can be reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are connected to each other by the connector. Are connected through one line of wiring. Therefore, the wiring work between the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be performed simply by attaching and detaching the connector, and the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be attached and detached more easily.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the serial signal system using the serial output circuit 78. Therefore, the number of wires between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 can also be reduced.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 includes the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605. A clock signal used in common for the ICs 611 to 615 and the input ICs 620 and 621 is output. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605, and the input ICs 620 and 621 can be easily synchronized. The number of clock signal wirings can also be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 may store the device IDs of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 as addresses in a predetermined address storage area of the RAM in advance. If comprised in that way, each lamp | ramp 125a-125f, 126a-126f, 281a-281l, 282a-282f, 283a-283f will be controlled using ID information intrinsic | native to serial-parallel conversion IC611-619 as address information. be able to.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the initialization notification is given priority over the abnormality notification, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization notification is difficult to recognize. That is, the initialization notification is performed prominently. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits an initialization designation command when a user reset that causes the program to start executing from the top address (for example, address 0000) occurs even when power supply to the game machine is started. As a cause of the occurrence of the user reset, for example, in the case where the watchdog timer is configured to be used, there is a case where the watchdog timer has timed out due to an illegal act that prevents the smooth progress of the program. Such fraudulent acts are configured to be controlled in a probabilistic state, particularly when a predetermined jackpot symbol (predetermined probability variation jackpot symbol or sudden probability variation jackpot symbol) is determined based on a random number for determining the jackpot symbol. It is likely to occur when it is. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is initialized, and a counter for generating a jackpot symbol determining random number is initialized, and it is easy to receive an illegal act that makes it easy to grasp the count value of the counter. By making the initialization notice conspicuous as in this embodiment, it is possible to easily grasp from the outside of the gaming machine that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has been initialized. Is easily recognized.

  In this embodiment, the production control board 80, the relay board 606, and the relay board are connected as the production control board 80, the board side IC board 601, the frame side IC boards 602-605, and the relay boards 606 and 607. 607 is connected to the bus type by one wiring route, and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604 are connected to the bus type by one system wiring route. As described above, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 are connected in series (hereinafter also referred to as daisy chain connection), or the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are connected. The serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the PC are connected in series (daisy chain type connection), so that It may be to reduce the number.

  FIG. 122 is a block diagram illustrating another configuration example of the effect control board 80, the relay boards 606 and 607, the board side IC board 601, and the frame side IC boards 602, 603, 604, and 605. In the example shown in FIG. 122, the effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 outputs a clock signal to the relay board 607 together with serial data as a control signal. The relay board 607 further supplies serial data and a clock signal input from the production control microcomputer 100 to the board-side IC board 601 via the relay board 606.

  The serial data input to the board side IC substrate 601 is first input to the serial-parallel conversion IC 619. As shown in FIG. 122, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board-side IC substrate 601 have serial data signal lines connected in a daisy chain type. Accordingly, the input serial data is sequentially transferred from the serial-parallel conversion IC 619 to the other serial-parallel conversion ICs 616, 618, and 617 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601. For example, by configuring the output of the last bit of the shift register 652 shown in FIG. 17 to the data latch unit 651 of the next serial-parallel conversion IC, serial data is sequentially sent to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619. What is necessary is just to forward. Each serial-parallel conversion IC 616 to 619 converts the input serial data into parallel data, and supplies the parallel data to the LEDs of the lamps provided on the game board 6. The clock signal input to the board-side IC board 601 is branched on the board-side IC board 601 and input to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 and the input IC 621.

  The relay board 607 supplies the serial data and the clock signal input from the production control microcomputer 100 to the frame side IC board 604 and the frame side IC board 605. The serial data input to the frame side IC substrate 604 is first input to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614. As shown in FIG. 122, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604 have serial data signal lines connected in a daisy chain type. Accordingly, the input serial data is sequentially transferred from the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 to the other serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 613 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 and 603. For example, the configuration is such that the output of the last bit of the shift register 652 shown in FIG. 19 is input to the data latch unit 651 of the next serial-parallel conversion IC, whereby serial data is sequentially sent to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614. What is necessary is just to forward. And each serial-parallel conversion IC611-614 converts the input serial data into parallel data, and supplies it to LED of each lamp provided in the game frame 11. FIG.

  The clock signal input to the frame side IC board 602 is branched on the frame side IC board 604 and input to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 and also input to the frame side IC board 602. The clock signal input to the frame side IC substrate 602 is branched on the frame side IC substrate 602, input to each serial-parallel conversion IC 611, 612, and input to the frame side IC substrate 603. The clock signal input to the frame side IC substrate 603 is branched on the frame side IC substrate 603 and input to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613. The clock signal input to the frame side IC substrate 605 is branched on the frame side IC substrate 605 and input to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 and the input IC 620.

  In the above embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 ends the initialization notification when a predetermined period has elapsed (see steps S901 to S905), but ends the initialization notification at another timing. May be. For example, the initialization notification is ended when the decorative symbol variable display is started for the first time after the initialization notification is started, or the abnormal winning notification designation command is received before the decorative symbol variable display is started. Sometimes the initialization notification may be terminated. Alternatively, the initialization notification may be terminated when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received or when the first effect control command other than the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received after the initialization notification is started. That is, it is preferable that the initialization notification is continued only for a period sufficient for the game store clerk or the like to recognize the initialization notification.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control means receives the variation pattern command, but when the display result specifying command cannot be received, the variation pattern command that can be used for both the normal big hit and the probable big hit. If it is determined that a change pattern command other than the change pattern command that can be used for both the normal big hit and the probable big hit is received is determined. Since the stop symbol is determined to be a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the received variation pattern, the effect display device 9 can notify that a big hit will occur even if the display result specifying command cannot be received due to noise or the like. Furthermore, immediately after receiving the variation pattern command, when it is determined that an effect control command other than the display result specifying command has been received, the above control based on the received variation pattern command may be performed. In other words, the effect control means determines that the regular command has not been received (for example, the display result specifying command cannot be received) or determines that the non-normal command has been received (for example, the display result subsequent to the variation pattern command). When an effect control command other than the specific command is received), it is preferable to execute effect control (for example, determine a stop symbol of a decorative symbol) based on the received regular command. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged due to non-reception of a regular command or reception of a non-regular command.

  The same control may be performed for other effect control commands. For example, when a jackpot start designation command that can identify the start of a specific gaming state is received, if it does not match the display result identification command that has already been received (for example, a display result 2 designation command indicating a normal jackpot is a display result identification When it is stored in the command storage area, when the jackpot start 3 designation command indicating the probability variation jackpot is received, the production control based on the jackpot start designation command (for example, the effect device notifies the probability variation jackpot) ) Or when a jackpot end designation command that can identify the end of a specific gaming state is received, if it does not match the jackpot start designation command that has already been received (for example, a jackpot start 1 designation command indicating a normal jackpot) After receiving a jackpot end designation 2 command indicating a probabilistic jackpot) Effect control (e.g., the background of the effect display device 9 on the background corresponding to the probability variation state) based on the de to run. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the control of the effect control means from being confused as much as possible with the control of the game control means.

  In the above embodiment, the lamp control signals with addresses are output to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619, whereby the LEDs 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of each lamp The case where the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d provided on the rotating bodies 84, 85 are controlled has been described, but a plurality of serial-parallel conversion ICs are connected in series with the same system wiring. The fixed length data including the lamp control signal for controlling all the lamps connected by the same system wiring may be output. Hereinafter, by outputting data of a fixed length including a lamp control signal for controlling all the lamps connected by the same system wiring, the LEDs 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a of each lamp are output. This embodiment for controlling ˜282f, 283a˜283f, and LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d provided on the rotators 84, 85 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configurations and processes as those of the above-described embodiment will be omitted, and different parts from the above-described embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77 and the effect control board 80 in the present embodiment. In addition, although the example shown in FIG. 123 shows the case where only the effect control board 80 is provided regarding the effect control, a lamp driver board and an audio output board may be provided. In this case, the lamp driver board and the sound output board are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101, a RAM (not shown), a serial output circuit 353, a serial input circuit 354, a latch signal output unit 355, a clock signal output unit 356, and an input capture signal output unit 357. A control microcomputer 100 is mounted. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives an effect control command via the serial input circuit 102 and the input port 103. In this case, the serial input circuit 102 converts the effect control command received as the serial data method into parallel data and outputs the parallel data. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the lamp via the serial output circuit 353. The serial output circuit converts the input signal (parallel data) for driving the LED of the lamp into serial data and outputs the serial data to the relay board 606.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, among the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 provided on the game frame 11 side, four ICs 611 to 614 are connected in series by wires of the same system. When controlling the top frame lamp, the left frame lamp, and the right frame lamp, the effect control CPU 101 includes a fixed lamp control signal for all the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 connected by the same system wiring. The length data (control signal string) is output via the serial output circuit 353 as a serial data system. Then, when the production control CPU 101 finishes outputting the fixed-length control signal sequence, the latch signal output unit 355 outputs a latch signal for causing the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 to capture the lamp control signal. .

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 provided on the game board 6 side are connected in series by the same system wiring. Controls lamps (specifically LEDs) provided around the center decoration lamp and stage lamp, LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, 85d provided on the rotating bodies 84, 85. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 uses the serial output circuit to transmit the fixed length data (control signal sequence) including the lamp control signals for all the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 connected by the same system wiring. The data is output as a serial data system via 353. Then, when the production control CPU 101 finishes outputting the fixed-length control signal sequence, it causes the latch signal output unit 355 to output a latch signal for causing the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 to capture the lamp control signal. .

  Of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 provided on the game frame 11 side, four ICs 615 are connected by a single wiring. When controlling the pan lamp or the operation button lamp, the effect control CPU 101 converts the lamp control signal for the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 connected by the single wiring into a serial data system via the serial output circuit 353. Output. When the effect control CPU 101 finishes outputting the lamp control signal, it causes the latch signal output unit 355 to output a latch signal for causing the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 to capture the lamp control signal.

  FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing still another configuration example of the effect control board 80, the relay boards 606 and 607, the board-side IC board 601, and the frame-side IC boards 602, 603, 604, and 605. The effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 outputs a clock signal to the relay board 606 together with serial data as a control signal. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a latch signal to the relay board 606 at the timing when the serial data has been output. The relay board 606 supplies serial data, a clock signal, and a latch signal input from the effect control microcomputer 100 to the board side IC board 601. The relay board 606 further supplies serial data, a clock signal, and a latch signal to the frame side IC boards 602 to 605 via the relay board 607.

  The serial data input to the board side IC substrate 601 is first input to the serial-parallel conversion IC 619. As shown in FIG. 124, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board-side IC substrate 601 are connected in series by the same system wiring. The connection by the same system wiring means that a plurality of serial-parallel conversion ICs are connected in series by a so-called bead connecting wiring. For example, each serial-parallel conversion IC 616 to 619 has serial data signal lines connected in a daisy chain type. Accordingly, the input serial data is sequentially transferred from the serial-parallel conversion IC 619 to the other serial-parallel conversion ICs 616, 618, and 617 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the output of the last bit of the shift register 682 mounted in each serial-parallel conversion IC is input to the data latch unit 681 of the next serial-parallel conversion IC (see FIG. 125), serial data may be sequentially transferred to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619. Each serial-parallel conversion IC 616 to 619 latches the serial data at the timing when the latch signal is input, converts the latched serial data into parallel data, and supplies it to the LED of each lamp provided on the game board 6. To do. The clock signal input to the board-side IC board 601 is branched on the board-side IC board 601 and input to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 and the input IC 621.

  The relay board 607 supplies serial data, a clock signal, and a latch signal input from the production control microcomputer 100 to the frame side IC board 604 and the frame side IC board 605. The serial data input to the frame side IC substrate 604 is first input to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614. As shown in FIG. 124, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604 are connected in series by wiring of the same system. For example, in each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614, signal lines for serial data are connected in a daisy chain type (connected by so-called daisy chain wiring). Accordingly, the input serial data is sequentially transferred from the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 to the other serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 613 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 and 603. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the output of the last bit of the shift register 682 mounted in each serial-parallel conversion IC is input to the data latch unit 681 of the next serial-parallel conversion IC (see FIG. 125), serial data may be transferred to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 in order. And each serial-parallel conversion IC611-614 latches serial data at the timing which inputted the latch signal, converts the inputted serial data latched into parallel data, LED of each lamp provided in the game frame 11 To supply.

  The clock signal input to the frame side IC board 602 is branched on the frame side IC board 604 and input to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 and also input to the frame side IC board 602. The clock signal input to the frame side IC substrate 602 is branched on the frame side IC substrate 602, input to each serial-parallel conversion IC 611, 612, and input to the frame side IC substrate 603. The clock signal input to the frame side IC substrate 603 is branched on the frame side IC substrate 603 and input to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613. The clock signal input to the frame side IC substrate 605 is branched on the frame side IC substrate 605 and input to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 and the input IC 620.

  The serial data input to the frame side IC substrate 605 is input to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615. Each serial-parallel conversion IC 615 latches the serial data at the timing when the latch signal is input, converts the latched input serial data into parallel data, and provides a dish lamp and an operation button lamp provided in the game frame 11. LEDs 82a to 82d, 83 are supplied. The clock signal input to the frame side IC substrate 605 is branched on the frame side IC substrate 605 and input to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 and the input IC 620.

  Next, the configuration of the serial-parallel conversion IC in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing a configuration of each serial-parallel conversion IC in the present embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 125, although the structure of each serial-parallel conversion IC611-614 provided in the game frame 11 side is shown as an example, each serial-parallel conversion IC616-619 provided in the game board 6 side, The configuration of another serial-parallel conversion IC 5615 provided on the game frame 11 side is also the same.

  As illustrated in FIG. 125, each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 614 includes a data latch unit 681, a shift register 682, and a data buffer 683. In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 125, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 are connected in series by the same system wiring in the order of IC614, IC611, IC612, and IC613.

  The data latch unit 681 is configured by, for example, a latch circuit. When serial data is input, the data latch unit 681 latches the input data bit by bit at a predetermined cycle, for example, the rising timing of the clock signal pulse, and outputs the latched data to the shift register 682. . The shift register 682 sequentially stores unit data, for example, data input bit by bit from the data latch unit 681. The shift register 682 shifts the stored data bit by bit at the rising timing of the clock signal pulse. By shifting the stored data one bit at a time, the shift register 682 is in a state where data is stored in all 8 bits. Further, when input data and a clock signal are input, the data of the last bit of the shift register 682 is changed to a subsequent stage of the serial-parallel conversion IC (hereinafter referred to as the lower side (the input side of the serial-parallel conversion IC is referred to as the upper side). In this case, the data is input to the data latch unit 681 of the serial-parallel conversion IC. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 125, the last bit data of the shift register 682 of the IC 614 is input to the data latch unit 681 of the lower-order IC 611, and the last bit data of the shift register 682 of the IC 611 is changed to the lower-order IC 612. The data of the last bit of the shift register 682 of the IC 612 is input to the data latch unit 681 of the lower-order IC 613. By doing so, the serial data output from the production control microcomputer 100 is transferred in the order of IC614, IC611, IC612, and IC613.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a control signal sequence including all lamp control signals for the four serial-parallel ICs 611 to 614 as a serial data system. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 starts with the lamp control signal for the IC on the lower side (that is, the lamp control signal for the IC 613, the lamp control signal for the IC 612, the lamp control signal for the IC 611, and the lamp for the IC 614). A control signal sequence including (in order of control signals) is output. As described above, when data is transferred in the order of IC614, IC611, IC612, and IC613, and the output of a series of control signal sequences is completed by the production control microcomputer 100, the shift register of IC613 The lamp control signal for IC613 is stored in 682, the lamp control signal for IC612 is stored in the shift register 682 of IC612, the lamp control signal for IC611 is stored in the shift register 682 of IC611, and the shift register 682 of IC614 is stored. The lamp control signal for the IC 614 is stored. Then, the data is taken in by the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 at the timing when the latch signal is output by the production control microcomputer 100.

  The data buffer 683 is constituted by, for example, a latch register. When a latch signal from the effect control microcomputer 100 is input, the data buffer 683 takes in and latches data stored in the shift register 682. The data buffer 683 supplies the fetched data to the LEDs of the respective lamps as parallel data (Q0 to Q7). Note that the timing (predetermined timing) at which the latch signal is input is a timing at which the latch signal is shifted over a longer span than the time required to send data to the lower-level IC.

  Next, a control signal sequence including a lamp control signal set in a predetermined data storage area according to error lamp control execution data will be described. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a control signal sequence including a lamp control signal output as a serial data method in the notification control process in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 126, in this embodiment, two patterns of error lamp control execution data (pattern A and pattern B) are used for each error type. In this embodiment, the blinking display of the lamp is controlled by switching and using the error lamp control execution data for the pattern A and the pattern B. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 associates a control signal sequence (or lamp control signal) including the lamp control signal shown in FIG. 126 with the error lamp control execution data, and a predetermined lamp provided in advance in the ROM. It is stored in the control signal storage area. Then, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a control signal sequence (or lamp control signal) including a lamp control signal from a predetermined lamp control signal storage area based on the error lamp control execution data, and outputs it to the serial output circuit 353. To do.

  In the case of RAM clear notification, as shown in FIG. 126, a control signal including a lamp control signal whose control data body corresponding to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 provided on the game frame 11 side is “00111111”. A column is sent. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l and 282a to 282f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. , 283a to 283f are turned on. In addition, when the RAM clear notification is made, a control signal sequence including the same lamp control signal is output when the error lamp control execution data is pattern A and pattern B, so that error notification is being executed. The LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side are continuously turned on.

  When notifying the door opening error, as shown in FIG. 126, first, it corresponds to each serial-parallel conversion IC 611-614 provided on the game frame 11 side based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A. A control signal sequence including a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l and 282a to 282f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. , 283a to 283f are turned on. Further, when the process data is switched, the lamp control whose control data body corresponding to each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 614 provided on the game frame 11 side is “00000000” based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B A control signal sequence including the signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 0 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are turned off. Is done. When notifying the door opening error by repeating such control, the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are blinked at predetermined time intervals. Control is performed.

  When notifying a ball break error, as shown in FIG. 126, first, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A, the control data body corresponding to each serial-parallel conversion IC 611, 612 is “00111111”. A control signal sequence including the lamp control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are turned on. At the time of process data switching, a control signal sequence including a lamp control signal whose control data body corresponding to each serial-parallel conversion IC 611, 612 is “00000000” is transmitted based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B. Is done. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of the ceiling lamp are all 0 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are turned off. When such a control is repeatedly performed to notify a ball-out error, control is performed such that only the LEDs 281a to 281l of the top frame lamps provided on the game frame 11 side blink at predetermined time intervals.

  When notifying a full tank error, as shown in FIG. 126, first, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A, the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 sends a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00001111”. Is sent. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of all the bits corresponding to the dish lamp LEDs 82a to 82d are 1, and the dish lamp LEDs 82a to 82d are turned on. At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LED of the dish lamp are all 0 is output, and the LEDs 82a to 82d of the dish lamp are turned off. When such a control is repeatedly performed and a full tank error is notified, control is performed such that only the LED lamps 82a to 82d of the pan lamp blink at a predetermined time interval.

  When notifying the prize ball error, as shown in FIG. 126, first, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A, the control data body corresponding to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 is “00111111”. A control signal sequence including a lamp control signal whose control data body corresponding to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 is “00000000” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to some of the LEDs of the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and only some of the LEDs 281a to 281f of the ceiling lamp provided on the game frame 11 side are lit. Is done. At the time of process data switching, the control data body corresponding to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 is “00000000” and the control data body corresponding to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 is based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B. A control signal sequence including a lamp control signal “00111111” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of all the bits corresponding to the other part of the ceiling lamps are all 1 is output, and the other part of the ceiling lamps 281g to 281g˜ Only 281l is lit. When such a control is repeatedly performed to notify a prize ball error, the LED 281a to 281f and the LEDs 281g to 281l of the top frame lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are alternately blinked at predetermined time intervals. Is done.

  When notifying an abnormal winning error, as shown in FIG. 126, first, it corresponds to each serial-parallel conversion IC 611-614 provided on the game frame 11 side based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A. A control signal sequence including a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00101010” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of all the bits corresponding to some of the LEDs of the lamp provided on the game frame 11 side are 1 is output, and some of the LEDs 281b of each lamp provided on the game frame 11 side. , 281d, 281f, 281h, 281j, 281l, 282b, 282d, 282f, 283b, 283d, 283f are lit. Further, when the process data is switched, the control data body corresponding to each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 614 provided on the game frame 11 side is “00010101” based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B. A control signal sequence including the signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of all the bits corresponding to some other LEDs of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are all 1 is output, and each lamp provided on the game frame 11 side. Only some of the other LEDs 281a, 281c, 281e, 281g, 281i, 281k, 282a, 282c, 282e, 283a, 283c, 283e are lit.

  When a prize ball error is notified by repeatedly performing the control as described above, the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are alternately staggered at predetermined time intervals. Control is performed so as to blink.

  Next, the serial setting process will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating an example of serial setting processing according to the present embodiment. In the serial setting process, for example, when decorative display of variable symbols is performed in the effect control process (see Steps S835C and 845C) and various error notifications are performed (Steps S632G, S645E, S647E, 651E, 655E, S659E, and S663E). , S907, S922, S929).

  In FIG. 127, the processes in steps S950 and S951 are the same as those in the above embodiment. If there is a change in the display state of each lamp in step S951, the CPU 101 for effect control converts a control signal sequence including a lamp control signal for the serial-parallel conversion IC of the lamp to be controlled for display into a predetermined lamp control signal storage area. (Step S952A). Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a control signal sequence including the extracted lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area provided in the RAM (step S953A). Then, a lamp control signal output request flag is set (step S954).

  In FIG. 127, the processes in steps S955 and S956 are the same as those in the above embodiment. When it is confirmed in the process of step S956 that the rotator control data is data indicating a speed change, the effect control CPU 101 determines the serial-parallel conversion IC for the motors 86 and 87 for driving the rotators 84 and 85. A control signal sequence including a motor control signal is extracted from a predetermined control signal storage area (step S957A). Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a control signal sequence including the extracted motor control signal in a predetermined data storage area provided in the RAM (step S958A). Then, a motor control signal output request flag is set (step S959).

  FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a data storage area in which a control signal string including a lamp control signal and a motor control signal to be output is set in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, three data storage areas each storing a control signal sequence including a lamp control signal and a motor control signal are prepared. In other words, the board side output data storage area for storing the control signal sequence output to each serial-parallel conversion IC 616 to 619 provided on the game board 6 side connected by the same system wiring is connected by the same system wiring. A frame-side output data storage area for storing control signal sequences output to the respective serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 provided on the game frame 11 side, and a serial-parallel conversion IC 615 provided on the game frame 11 side. A dish-side output data storage area for storing the output control signal sequence is provided.

  For example, when the CPU 101 for effect control notifies the RAM clear notification, the door opening error, the ball break error, the winning ball error or the abnormal winning error, the RAM clear notification, the door shown in FIG. 126 is displayed in step S952A of the serial setting process. A control signal sequence including a lamp control signal corresponding to an opening error, a ball break error, a winning ball error, or an abnormal winning error is extracted and stored in the frame side output data storage area shown in FIG. Further, for example, when the full control error is notified, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the lamp control signal corresponding to the full error shown in FIG. 126 in step S952A of the serial setting process, and outputs the dish side output data shown in FIG. Store in the storage area.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of serial input / output processing (step S708) in the present embodiment. In FIG. 129, the processes in steps S970 and S971 are the same as those in the above embodiment. When the lamp control signal output request flag or the motor control signal output request flag is reset, the presentation control CPU 101 outputs a control signal sequence including the lamp control signal and the motor control signal stored in the data storage area to the serial output circuit 353. (Step S972A). Then, the output control signal sequence including the lamp control signal and the motor control signal is converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and the board side IC board 601 and each frame side IC board are connected via the relay boards 606 and 607. From 602 to 605, the data is output as a serial data system. Next, the production control CPU 101 requires a predetermined time (from when the control signal sequence is output to the serial output circuit 353 until it is output as a serial data system to the panel side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605. After the elapse of time, the latch signal output unit 355 is caused to output a latch signal to each frame side IC substrate 602 to 605 (step S972B).

  When the control signal sequence is stored in any one of the three data storage areas shown in FIG. 128, the effect control CPU 101 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S972A and S972B a plurality of times. For example, if the control signal sequence is stored in all three data storage areas shown in FIG. 128, the presentation control CPU 101 first extracts the control signal sequence from the board-side output data storage area and outputs the serial signal. The data is output to the circuit 353 (see step S972A). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the latch signal output unit 355 is caused to output a latch signal to the board side IC substrate 601 (see step S972B). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a control signal sequence from the frame-side output data storage area and outputs it to the serial output circuit 353 (see step S972A). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the latch signal output unit 355 is caused to output a latch signal to the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604 (see step S972B). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the lamp control signal from the dish-side output data storage area and outputs it to the serial output circuit 353 (see step S972A). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the latch signal output unit 355 is caused to output a latch signal to the frame side IC substrate 605 (see step S972B).

  Note that the processes in steps S973 to S976 are the same as those in the above embodiment.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the production control commands received from the game control microcomputer 560, and the LEDs 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l of the respective lamps. , 282a to 282f and 283a to 283f, a control signal is output in a serial signal system. Further, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are connected through one system wiring. The Therefore, the number of wirings between the game board 6 and the game frame 11 can be reduced. Therefore, in a gaming machine in which the game frame 11 and the game board 6 are configured to be detachable, it is possible to easily attach and detach the game frame 11 and the game board 6.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 has a fixed length including control signal information of all production electrical parts (lamps and motors) connected in series to the same system wiring. This data is output by the serial signal method for each predetermined period of unit data. Therefore, it is not necessary to assign different addresses to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board-side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame-side IC substrates 602 to 605 in advance. Can do.

  In this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 are connected by the same system wiring, and the serial-parallel ICs 602 to 604 mounted on the frame side IC substrate 602 to 604 are connected. Although the case where the parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 are connected by the same system wiring has been described, the serial conversion parallel ICs 616 to 619 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 are mounted. All of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 may be connected by wiring of the same system.

  FIG. 130 is a block diagram showing still another configuration example of the effect control board 80, the relay boards 606 and 607, the board-side IC board 601, and the frame-side IC boards 602, 603, 604, and 605 in the present embodiment. In FIG. 130, all of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are all of the same system wiring. Connected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 130, the serial data output from the production control microcomputer 100 is first input to the serial-parallel conversion IC 619 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 via the relay board 606. The input serial data is sequentially transferred from the serial-parallel conversion IC 619 to the other serial-parallel conversion ICs 616, 618, and 617 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601.

  Further, the lowest-order serial-parallel conversion IC 617 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 further outputs serial data to the relay board 606. The serial data is input from the relay board 606 to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 mounted on the frame side IC board 604 via the relay board 607. The input serial data is sequentially transferred from the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 to the other serial-parallel conversion ICs 611, 612, 613, 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605.

  In each of the above embodiments, as the movable member, the rotating bodies 84 and 84 that rotate over the display area 82C and the transparent portion 61 (transparent area) in the game board 6 are exemplified (see FIG. 10 and the like). In the transparent game board, the rotating bodies 84 and 84 that rotate over a plurality of areas divided by the decorative member 82 and the decorative member 82A, which are opaque members, are illustrated, but at a predetermined timing, in the display area 82C or the transparent area, or A movable member that appears in the display area 82C and the transparent area may be used.

  131 and 132, a game board on which a movable member 88 </ b> A that can be moved between the display area 82 </ b> C and the transparent portion 61 (transparent area) and whose viewing state is changed according to the gaming state is installed. 6 is a front view showing 6. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 131, the movable member 88A moves linearly by a gear 88C connected to the shaft of the motor 88B, and operates to enter the display area 82C when the motor 88B rotates in a predetermined direction. That is, the movable member 88A becomes visible in the display area 82C. Further, when the motor 88B rotates in the reverse direction, as shown in FIG. 132, the motor 88B operates to enter the transparent portion 61 (transparent region). That is, the movable member 88A becomes visible in the transparent portion 61 (transparent region). The rotation of the motor 88B is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100. When the performance is not performed, the movable member 88A is set to the state shown in FIG. 131 or the state shown in FIG. 132, for example.

  When the control is performed as shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the movable members 88A and 88B in the reach effect, the notice effect, the effect executed during the jackpot game, and other effects. The display area 82C and the transparent portion 61 are controlled to appear. Even with such control, the contents of the effects can be enriched using the movable members 88A and 88B.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 and the like, when the movable member is stopped, the movable member is installed at a position where the movable member cannot be seen in the game area 7 (opaque game area). You may make it stop. In addition, when the movable member is stopped, not all of the movable member can be visually recognized, but a part of the movable member may be positioned so as to be visually recognized, as shown in FIGS. 131 and 132. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, depending on the gaming state, the visible ratio of the movable member (with respect to the total area of the visible area out of the total area of the movable member when viewed in plan view) The movable member may be moved so that the ratio) can be changed.

  Further, the transparent portion 61 in the game board 6 may be colorless and transparent, but may be formed of a colored (for example, gray or black) transparent acrylic plate. Moreover, you may make it stick a colored transparent sheet | seat on the surface or back surface of the colorless and transparent transparent part 61. FIG. Furthermore, the transparent portion 61 is formed of a member such as glass that develops color by applying a voltage, for example, and the production control microcomputer 100 applies a voltage to the transparent portion 61 at a predetermined time (for example, while the rotating bodies 84 and 85 are rotating). May be applied. That is, a transparency suppressing means for suppressing the transparency of the game area may be provided. When the transparency suppression means is provided, the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, and 85d installed on the rotating bodies 84 and 85 can be made more visible.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, each of LED84a, 84b, 84c, 84d and LED85a, 85b, 85c, 85d is a monochromatic LED. However, the LEDs 84a, 84b, 84c, and 84d and the LEDs 85a, 85b, 85c, and 85d may be full-color LEDs, and the production control microcomputer 100 may control the color generation according to the progress of the production.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly sends a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 sends an effect control command to another board. It is also possible to transmit it to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through the other board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the other board, and the voice control and the lamp control are performed in response to the control means receiving the command. The related control may be executed, and the received command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 that controls the effect display device 9 as it is or, for example, to a simplified command. Even in such a case, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command received from another board in the same manner as the display control is performed in response to the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to the above.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and is particularly preferably applied to a gaming machine provided with a movable member for production.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 6 Game board 8 Special symbol display 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 20 Variable winning ball apparatus 30 Operation button 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
61 Transparent portion 560 Microcomputer for game control 80 Production control board 81 Frame body 82 Decoration member 82A Decoration member 82B Frame portion 82C Hollow-out portion (display area)
82D Frame portion 84, 85 Rotating body (movable member)
86, 87 Motor 861, 871 Position sensor 84a, 84b, 84c, 84d LED
85a, 85b, 85c, 85d LED
86A Rotating shaft 91 Case 91a, 91b Signal line 93a, 93b Conductive member (conductor)
100 effect control microcomputer 101 effect control CPU
109 VDP
125a-125f Center decoration lamp (LED)
126a-126f Stage lamp (LED)
281a-281l Ceiling lamp (LED)
282a-282f Left frame lamp (LED)
283a-283f Right frame lamp (LED)
353 Serial output circuit 354 Serial input circuit 601 Board side IC board 602 to 605 Frame side IC board 606,607 Relay board 611 to 619 Serial-parallel conversion IC
620,621 Input IC

Claims (1)

A game frame installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, having a transparent portion, attached to the game frame, and having a game area formed on the front side can be exchanged. A gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game using a game medium,
A movable member provided on the rear side of the transparent game board;
An opaque member that divides the gaming area into a plurality of areas;
The drive mechanism for driving the movable member is provided so as to overlap the back side of the opaque member,
Movable member control means for operating the movable member by the drive mechanism;
The movable member control means arranges the movable member on the back side of the opaque member when operation is stopped,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting an effect control command for controlling the electric parts for the effect,
Production control means including the movable member control means, and controlling electrical parts for production in response to the production control command transmitted by the game control means,
The game control means and the effect control means are mounted on the transparent game board,
The game control means includes command transmission means for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control means,
The effect control means includes an output means for outputting a control signal for controlling the electric parts for the effect in a serial signal system based on the effect control command received from the game control means,
The board side serial-parallel conversion provided in the transparent game board, which converts the control signal input from the output means of the effect control means from a serial signal system to a parallel signal system and outputs it to the electrical components for the effect. A circuit and a plurality of frame side serial-parallel conversion circuits provided in the game frame;
The board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit outputs the control signal converted into a parallel signal system to an electric part provided in the transparent game board among the electric parts for production,
The plurality of frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuits output the control signal converted into a parallel signal system to an electrical component provided in the game frame among the electrical components for presentation,
A game frame side relay board for relaying connection between the plurality of frame side serial-parallel conversion circuits and the effect control means is provided in the game frame,
The signal line of the control signal to the plurality of frame side serial-parallel conversion circuits output by the output means in a serial signal system is detachably connected to the game frame side relay board using one connector. A gaming machine characterized by